1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \use_dash_ligatures true
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
82 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 1
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 1
105 \use_package stmaryrd 1
106 \use_package undertilde 1
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
117 \notefontcolor #0000ff
134 \paragraph_separation skip
137 \math_numbering_side default
138 \quotes_style english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes false
144 \output_changes false
158 by the \SpecialChar LyX
163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
165 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
166 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
167 Documentation mailing list:
168 \begin_inset CommandInset href
170 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Newline newline
190 \begin_inset Note Note
193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
194 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
195 \begin_inset Newline newline
200 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
201 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
209 \begin_layout Standard
210 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
211 LatexCommand tableofcontents
218 \begin_layout Chapter
222 \begin_layout Section
223 What is \SpecialChar LyX
227 \begin_layout Standard
229 is a document preparation system.
230 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
231 scripts, publishable books, business
232 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
233 It is unlike most other
234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
241 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
243 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
259 pt type, left justified, 5
260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
269 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
273 \begin_layout Standard
274 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
279 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
283 \begin_layout Standard
288 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
289 's philosophy: most importantly,
290 the format of all of the manuals.
291 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
292 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
298 manual describes that, too.
301 \begin_layout Section
306 \begin_layout Standard
307 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
308 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
310 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
311 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
315 \begin_layout Standard
316 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
317 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
318 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
320 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
321 only a vertical scrollbar.
322 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
323 The first case is large images.
324 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
325 image and use the option
336 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
339 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
340 this doesn't work for equations yet.
343 \begin_layout Standard
344 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
345 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
353 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
360 \begin_layout Section
364 \begin_layout Standard
365 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
367 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
369 Just select the manual you want to read from the
376 \begin_layout Section
377 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
381 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
388 \begin_layout Standard
389 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
390 can be configured via the menu
392 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
396 \begin_inset Index idx
399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
406 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
408 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 packages are available.
410 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
412 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
414 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
419 \begin_inset space \space{}
422 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
423 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
425 To force \SpecialChar LyX
426 to re-inspect your system, you should use
428 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
432 \begin_inset Index idx
435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
436 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
442 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
443 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
446 \begin_layout Section
449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
451 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
458 \begin_layout Standard
459 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
460 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
461 installed, but you will not be
462 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
463 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
464 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
465 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
466 document can always be output as plain text
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 or DocBook classes or packages.
473 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
474 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
477 \begin_layout Standard
478 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
479 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
480 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
483 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
491 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
492 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
495 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
499 \begin_inset Index idx
502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
503 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
511 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
518 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
522 \begin_layout Chapter
523 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
527 \begin_layout Section
528 Basic File Operations
529 \begin_inset Index idx
532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
541 \begin_layout Standard
546 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
547 in addition to some more advanced operations:
550 \begin_layout Itemize
572 \begin_layout Itemize
588 arg "buffer-new-template"
594 \begin_layout Itemize
616 \begin_layout Itemize
626 \begin_layout Itemize
640 \begin_layout Itemize
662 \begin_layout Itemize
674 arg "buffer-write-as"
680 \begin_layout Itemize
694 \begin_layout Itemize
708 \begin_layout Standard
709 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
710 a few minor differences.
713 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
724 command lists the available templates.
725 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
726 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
727 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
735 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
742 \begin_layout Standard
743 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
775 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
776 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
777 is just that — a big, blank space.
785 \begin_layout Standard
806 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
811 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
814 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
832 will reload the document from disk.
833 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
834 and want to restore it to the last save.
843 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
844 them as your changes.
847 \begin_layout Section
848 Basic Editing Features
849 \begin_inset Index idx
852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
859 \begin_inset CommandInset label
861 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
868 \begin_layout Standard
869 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
870 can perform cut and paste operations
871 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
872 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
873 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
874 editing features and how to access
876 We will start with cut and paste.
879 \begin_layout Standard
880 As you might expect, the
884 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
885 various other editing features.
886 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
890 \begin_layout Itemize
896 \begin_inset Index idx
899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
928 \begin_layout Itemize
934 \begin_inset Index idx
937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
966 \begin_layout Itemize
972 \begin_inset Index idx
975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1000 \begin_layout Itemize
1004 \begin_inset space ~
1010 \begin_layout Itemize
1014 \begin_inset space ~
1020 \begin_layout Itemize
1024 \begin_inset space ~
1028 \begin_inset space ~
1034 \begin_inset Index idx
1037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1046 \begin_inset Index idx
1049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1064 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1074 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1080 \begin_layout Standard
1081 The first three are self-explanatory.
1082 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1083 and other programs by
1104 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1105 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1110 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1111 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1112 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1113 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1114 into individual cells.
1118 \begin_inset space ~
1123 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1124 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1128 \begin_layout Standard
1132 \begin_inset space ~
1137 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1139 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1141 \begin_inset space ~
1148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1154 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1155 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1156 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1162 \begin_inset space \space{}
1165 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1166 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1169 \begin_inset space ~
1172 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1174 \begin_inset space ~
1178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1182 \begin_inset space ~
1191 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1192 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1194 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1198 \begin_inset space ~
1203 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1204 start a new paragraph.
1205 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1206 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1211 \begin_inset space ~
1214 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1220 \begin_inset space ~
1228 \begin_inset space ~
1231 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1234 paste from the primary selection.
1235 This is normally the currently selected text.
1238 \begin_layout Standard
1241 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1243 \begin_inset space ~
1247 \begin_inset space ~
1255 \begin_inset space ~
1259 \begin_inset space ~
1265 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1271 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1274 \begin_inset space ~
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1288 button to skip the current word.
1292 \begin_inset space ~
1297 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1301 \begin_inset space ~
1306 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1308 If the toggle is set, searching for
1309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1320 will not match the word
1321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1335 Match whole words only
1337 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1338 to only find complete words, e.
1339 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1368 offers also an advanced
1371 \begin_inset space ~
1375 \begin_inset space ~
1380 feature that is described in section
1381 \begin_inset space ~
1385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1387 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1394 \begin_layout Standard
1395 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1396 \begin_inset space \space{}
1400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1408 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1410 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1415 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1422 \begin_layout Standard
1426 arg "inset-select-all"
1429 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1430 When the cursor is inside an inset
1433 arg "inset-select-all"
1436 selects the content of the inset.
1440 arg "inset-select-all"
1443 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1448 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1451 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1455 \begin_layout Section
1457 \begin_inset Index idx
1460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1467 \begin_inset Index idx
1470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1479 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1486 \begin_layout Standard
1487 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1489 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1495 or the toolbar button
1501 to undo some mistake.
1502 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1504 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1507 or the toolbar button
1514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1521 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1525 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1528 \begin_layout Standard
1529 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1538 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1539 This is a consequence of the 100
1540 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1543 step undo limit mentioned above.
1546 \begin_layout Standard
1555 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1557 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1561 \begin_layout Section
1563 \begin_inset Index idx
1566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1575 \begin_layout Standard
1576 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1579 \begin_layout Enumerate
1584 \begin_layout Itemize
1589 once anywhere in the edit window.
1590 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1594 \begin_layout Enumerate
1599 \begin_layout Itemize
1606 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1609 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1612 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1613 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1616 \begin_layout Itemize
1617 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1620 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1627 \begin_layout Enumerate
1628 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1632 \begin_layout Standard
1633 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1634 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1638 \begin_layout Section
1640 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1642 name "sec:Navigating"
1647 \begin_inset Index idx
1650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1659 \begin_layout Standard
1661 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1664 \begin_layout Itemize
1669 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1670 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1673 \begin_layout Itemize
1674 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1676 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1678 \begin_inset space ~
1683 or by the toolbar button
1686 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1692 \begin_layout Itemize
1693 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1695 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1698 and use the same menu to return to them.
1699 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1702 \begin_layout Standard
1706 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1711 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1712 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1714 \begin_inset space ~
1719 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1720 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1721 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1722 your last editing position.
1725 \begin_layout Standard
1730 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1734 \begin_layout Subsection
1736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1738 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1743 \begin_inset Index idx
1746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1747 Navigating ! Outline
1753 \begin_inset Index idx
1756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1765 \begin_layout Standard
1766 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1767 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1768 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1770 \begin_inset space ~
1774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1776 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1780 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1781 \begin_inset space ~
1785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1787 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1792 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1796 \begin_layout Standard
1797 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1798 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1799 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1800 dialog and to modify the citation.
1803 \begin_layout Standard
1808 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1809 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1811 Labels and References
1813 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1822 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1825 \begin_layout Standard
1826 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1827 you further to control the display.
1832 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1833 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1839 option keeps it in the current view state.
1840 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1841 \begin_inset space ~
1844 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1845 \begin_inset space ~
1848 3, the subsections of sections
1849 \begin_inset space ~
1852 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1857 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1858 \begin_inset space ~
1862 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1872 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1875 \begin_layout Standard
1882 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1883 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1897 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1898 So, for example, you can move section
1899 \begin_inset space ~
1903 \begin_inset space ~
1906 2.4 or after section
1907 \begin_inset space ~
1912 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1925 (or the corresponding key bindings
1933 ) you can change the level of sections.
1934 So you can for example make section
1935 \begin_inset space ~
1939 \begin_inset space ~
1943 \begin_inset space ~
1949 \begin_layout Standard
1950 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1951 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1954 \begin_layout Subsection
1955 Horizontal Scrolling
1956 \begin_inset Index idx
1959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1960 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1968 \begin_layout Standard
1970 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1976 \begin_inset space \space{}
1980 \begin_inset space ~
1983 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1984 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1985 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1989 \begin_layout Standard
1990 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1994 \begin_layout Itemize
1996 is used on a small tablet computer
1999 \begin_layout Itemize
2000 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2012 \begin_inset space ~
2025 \begin_layout Itemize
2026 Math constructs with long command names
2029 \begin_layout Standard
2030 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2031 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2033 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2034 windows so that table
2035 \begin_inset space ~
2039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2041 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2046 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2048 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2049 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2052 \begin_layout Standard
2053 \begin_inset Float table
2059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2060 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2065 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2069 Horizontal scrolling test.
2077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2079 \begin_inset Tabular
2080 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2081 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2082 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2126 \begin_layout Section
2127 Input/Word Completion
2128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2130 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2135 \begin_inset Index idx
2138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2145 \begin_inset Index idx
2148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_layout Standard
2181 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2183 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2184 is used to propose completions.
2187 \begin_layout Standard
2188 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2191 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2196 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2203 \begin_inset space ~
2207 \begin_inset space ~
2212 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2216 \begin_inset space ~
2221 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2222 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2226 \begin_inset space ~
2232 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2233 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2234 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2235 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2238 \begin_layout Standard
2240 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2241 completions available.
2246 key to accept a proposed completion.
2247 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2248 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2249 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2256 \begin_layout Standard
2257 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2258 ing options for text.
2259 The special math option
2263 enables characters to be composed.
2264 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2265 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2268 , you can then input the characters
2269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2280 to a formula to get it.
2281 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2282 of the math toolbar.
2283 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2287 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2288 's installation folder.
2289 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2298 \begin_layout Section
2300 \begin_inset Index idx
2303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2310 \begin_inset Index idx
2313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2342 \begin_inset Index idx
2345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2376 \begin_layout Standard
2377 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2391 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2394 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2398 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2399 \begin_inset space ~
2403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2405 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2412 \begin_layout Standard
2416 \begin_inset space ~
2424 \begin_inset space ~
2445 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2449 \begin_layout Labeling
2450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2454 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2455 LatexCommand nomenclature
2457 description "Tabulator key"
2464 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2466 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2467 \begin_inset space ~
2471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2473 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2480 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2484 , especially section
2485 \begin_inset space ~
2489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2491 reference "subsec:Lists"
2497 If you are still confused, look in the
2502 \begin_inset Newline newline
2510 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2511 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2515 \begin_layout Labeling
2516 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2520 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2521 LatexCommand nomenclature
2523 description "Escape key"
2531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2538 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2539 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2542 \begin_layout Labeling
2543 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2549 \begin_inset space ~
2553 \begin_inset space ~
2560 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2561 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2565 \begin_layout Standard
2566 There are three modifier keys:
2569 \begin_layout Labeling
2570 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2588 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2589 LatexCommand nomenclature
2591 description "Control key"
2596 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2597 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2601 \begin_layout Itemize
2610 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2613 \begin_layout Itemize
2622 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2625 \begin_layout Itemize
2634 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2638 \begin_layout Labeling
2639 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2657 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2658 LatexCommand nomenclature
2660 description "Shift key"
2665 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2666 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2669 \begin_layout Labeling
2670 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2688 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2689 LatexCommand nomenclature
2691 description "Alt or Meta key"
2696 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2697 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2698 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2704 \begin_inset Newline newline
2707 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2709 menu accelerator keys
2712 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2713 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2717 \begin_layout Standard
2718 For example, the sequence
2719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2725 \begin_inset space ~
2729 \begin_inset space ~
2735 \begin_inset space ~
2743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2762 \begin_inset space ~
2768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2778 \begin_layout Standard
2783 manual lists all other things bound to the
2791 \begin_layout Standard
2792 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2794 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2795 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2796 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2797 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2798 The \SpecialChar LyX
2799 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2800 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2801 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2803 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2819 followed by a capital
2826 \begin_layout Chapter
2829 \begin_inset Index idx
2832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2842 \begin_layout Section
2844 \begin_inset Index idx
2847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2856 \begin_layout Subsection
2860 \begin_layout Standard
2861 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2862 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2863 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2864 numbering schemes, and so on.
2865 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2866 and format the title of your document differently.
2869 \begin_layout Standard
2874 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2875 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2876 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2877 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2878 picks one for you by default.
2879 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2882 \begin_layout Subsection
2884 \begin_inset Index idx
2887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2896 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2903 \begin_layout Standard
2904 You can select a class using the
2906 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2907 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2911 \begin_inset Index idx
2914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2921 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2925 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2929 \begin_layout Standard
2930 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2935 \begin_layout Description
2936 Article for basic articles
2939 \begin_layout Description
2940 Report for basic reports
2943 \begin_layout Description
2944 Book for writing a book
2947 \begin_layout Description
2948 Letter for US-style letters
2951 \begin_layout Standard
2952 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2953 only uses if you have installed
2954 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2955 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2956 distributions will include
2958 Here are some of the classes.
2959 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2961 Special Document Classes
2970 \begin_layout Description
2971 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2974 \begin_layout Description
2975 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2979 \begin_layout Description
2980 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2984 \begin_layout Description
2985 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2986 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2987 There are three article layouts available.
2988 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2989 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2990 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2991 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2996 sequential numbering
2997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3000 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3001 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3002 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3003 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3006 \begin_layout Description
3007 Beamer Layout for presentations
3010 \begin_layout Description
3011 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3012 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3013 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3014 with \SpecialChar LyX
3018 \begin_layout Description
3019 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3022 \begin_layout Description
3024 \begin_inset space ~
3027 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3030 \begin_layout Description
3031 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3034 \begin_layout Description
3035 Foils Used to make transparencies
3038 \begin_layout Description
3039 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3040 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3041 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3042 with \SpecialChar LyX
3046 \begin_layout Description
3047 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3048 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3051 \begin_layout Description
3052 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3055 \begin_layout Description
3056 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3059 \begin_layout Description
3060 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3061 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3062 (Is used by this document.)
3065 \begin_layout Description
3066 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3069 \begin_layout Description
3070 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3073 \begin_layout Description
3078 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3079 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3081 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3085 \begin_layout Description
3086 Slides Used to make transparencies
3089 \begin_layout Description
3091 \begin_inset space ~
3094 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3095 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3098 \begin_layout Description
3099 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3102 \begin_layout Standard
3103 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3105 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3107 Special Document Classes
3114 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3115 of the document classes.
3118 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3122 \begin_layout Standard
3123 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3125 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3126 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3128 \begin_inset Index idx
3131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3148 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3149 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3151 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3154 \begin_layout Standard
3157 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3162 , are highly specialized.
3164 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3165 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3166 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3167 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3168 by some document class.
3169 There are just too many of them.
3170 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3173 \begin_layout Standard
3174 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3182 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3183 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3184 document class for a new file.
3186 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3189 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3196 manual for information on how to install them.
3197 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3203 \begin_layout Standard
3204 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3205 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3206 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3207 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3208 class files to be used for dissertation
3209 s submitted to those universities.
3210 The \SpecialChar LyX
3211 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3213 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3217 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3223 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3226 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3230 name "subsec:Modules"
3235 \begin_inset Index idx
3238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3247 \begin_layout Standard
3248 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3249 chosen document class.
3250 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3251 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3258 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3262 \begin_inset Index idx
3265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3272 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3276 \begin_layout Standard
3277 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3278 packages or file format converters that are not always
3279 installed by default.
3281 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3282 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3283 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3284 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3286 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3287 file without the missing prerequisites.
3288 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3289 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3292 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3296 \begin_inset Index idx
3299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3300 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3306 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3311 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3314 \begin_layout Standard
3315 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3323 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3325 will advise you about these things.
3333 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3337 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3342 \begin_inset Index idx
3345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3346 Document ! Local Layout
3354 \begin_layout Standard
3355 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3356 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3357 : They are intended to be used in
3358 a variety of different documents.
3359 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3360 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3361 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3362 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3363 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3365 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3383 manual for information on how to use it.
3386 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3390 \begin_layout Standard
3391 Each class has a default set of options.
3392 Here's a quick table describing them:
3395 \begin_layout Standard
3396 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3402 \begin_layout Standard
3404 \begin_inset Tabular
3405 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3406 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3407 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3408 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3865 \begin_layout Standard
3866 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3872 \begin_layout Standard
3873 You're probably also wondering what
3874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3878 \begin_inset space ~
3882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3886 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3887 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3892 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3897 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3907 headings, there are also
3915 headings, and so on.
3916 We will describe these headings fully in section
3917 \begin_inset space ~
3921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3923 reference "subsec:Headings"
3930 \begin_layout Subsection
3932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3934 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3939 \begin_inset Index idx
3942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3949 \begin_inset Index idx
3952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3961 \begin_layout Standard
3962 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3964 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3971 \begin_inset space ~
3979 \begin_inset space ~
3984 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3986 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3987 doesn't support special options you want to
3988 use for your document.
3989 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3990 -class and its options, you have to read
3994 \begin_layout Standard
3998 \begin_inset space ~
4005 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4011 \begin_inset space ~
4016 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4017 You can choose between the following five options:
4020 \begin_layout Labeling
4021 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4026 Use default page style of current class.
4029 \begin_layout Labeling
4030 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4035 No page numbers or headings.
4038 \begin_layout Labeling
4039 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4047 \begin_layout Labeling
4048 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4053 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4054 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4055 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4056 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4059 \begin_layout Labeling
4060 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4065 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4066 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4072 \begin_inset Index idx
4075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4083 How they are defined is explained in section
4084 \begin_inset space ~
4088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4090 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4097 \begin_layout Standard
4098 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4099 \begin_inset space ~
4103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4105 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4112 \begin_layout Subsection
4113 Paper Size and Orientation
4114 \begin_inset Index idx
4117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4118 Document ! Paper size
4124 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4126 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4133 \begin_layout Standard
4134 You can find the following options in the menu
4137 \begin_inset space ~
4144 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4148 \begin_inset Index idx
4151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4160 \begin_layout Labeling
4161 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4165 \begin_inset space ~
4170 What size paper to print on.
4175 \begin_layout Itemize
4181 \begin_layout Itemize
4187 \begin_layout Itemize
4193 \begin_layout Itemize
4199 \begin_layout Itemize
4202 US letter, US legal, US executive
4205 \begin_layout Itemize
4211 \begin_layout Itemize
4218 \begin_layout Labeling
4219 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4224 To choose whether to output as
4235 \begin_layout Labeling
4236 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4240 \begin_inset space ~
4245 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4246 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4249 \begin_layout Subsection
4251 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4253 name "subsec:Margins"
4258 \begin_inset Index idx
4261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4268 \begin_inset Index idx
4271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4280 \begin_layout Standard
4281 Paper margins are set in the menu
4283 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4287 \begin_inset Index idx
4290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4299 \begin_layout Standard
4300 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4301 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4302 the paper format and the font size into account.
4305 \begin_layout Subsection
4309 \begin_layout Standard
4310 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4316 That includes the paragraph environments.
4317 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4318 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4319 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4321 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4330 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4332 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4333 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4334 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4337 \begin_layout Section
4338 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4339 \begin_inset Index idx
4342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4343 Paragraph ! Indentation
4351 \begin_layout Subsection
4353 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4355 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4362 \begin_layout Standard
4363 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4364 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4367 \begin_layout Standard
4368 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4369 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4370 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4371 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4375 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4381 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4382 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4383 language than English.
4385 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4388 \begin_layout Standard
4389 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4390 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4391 into \SpecialChar LyX
4393 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4396 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4398 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4399 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4400 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4407 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4408 goes to produce a printable file.
4413 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4415 gives you the ability globally to change
4419 these pre-coded spacings.
4420 We will explain more later.
4423 \begin_layout Subsection
4424 Paragraph Separation
4425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4427 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4432 \begin_inset Index idx
4435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4436 Paragraph ! Separation
4444 \begin_layout Standard
4452 \begin_inset space ~
4460 \begin_inset space ~
4467 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4471 \begin_inset Index idx
4474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4480 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4483 \begin_layout Subsection
4487 \begin_layout Standard
4488 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4491 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4493 \begin_inset space ~
4498 dialog and toggle the
4501 \begin_inset space ~
4506 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4509 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4513 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4514 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4518 \begin_layout Standard
4519 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4520 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4523 \begin_layout Subsection
4525 \begin_inset Index idx
4528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4529 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4537 \begin_layout Standard
4540 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4544 \begin_inset Index idx
4547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4556 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4560 \begin_inset space ~
4569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4570 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4576 \begin_inset Index idx
4579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4586 installed to use this feature.
4591 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4593 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4595 \begin_inset space ~
4600 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4601 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4604 \begin_layout Section
4605 Paragraph Environments
4606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4608 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4613 \begin_inset Index idx
4616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4617 Paragraph ! Environments
4623 \begin_inset Index idx
4626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4627 Paragraph environments|(
4635 \begin_layout Subsection
4639 \begin_layout Standard
4640 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4643 \begin_layout Standard
4652 } \SpecialChar ldots
4662 \begin_inset Newline newline
4665 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4667 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4668 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4669 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4678 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4681 \begin_layout Standard
4682 A paragraph environment is simply a
4683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4690 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4691 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4692 scheme, labels, and so on.
4693 Additionally, you can
4694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4701 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4702 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4703 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4704 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4706 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4708 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4711 \begin_layout Standard
4712 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4713 \begin_inset Graphics
4714 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4720 at the left end of the toolbar.
4722 will change the environment of the
4726 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4727 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4728 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4732 \begin_layout Standard
4741 create a new paragraph using the
4745 paragraph environment.
4747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4754 because if you are in one of these environments:
4757 \begin_layout Itemize
4763 \begin_layout Itemize
4769 \begin_layout Itemize
4775 \begin_layout Itemize
4781 \begin_layout Itemize
4787 \begin_layout Itemize
4793 \begin_layout Itemize
4799 \begin_layout Standard
4801 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4805 , rather than resetting it to
4810 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4811 \begin_inset space ~
4815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4817 reference "sec:Nesting"
4824 \begin_layout Subsection
4828 \begin_layout Standard
4829 The default paragraph environment is
4834 It creates a plain paragraph.
4836 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4837 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4838 this manual) are in the
4845 \begin_layout Standard
4846 You can nest a paragraph using the
4850 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4858 \begin_layout Subsection
4860 \begin_inset Index idx
4863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4872 \begin_layout Standard
4873 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4874 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4883 for thanks or contact information.
4884 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4885 places all of this on a separate page
4886 along with today's date.
4887 For other types of documents, the title
4888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4895 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4899 \begin_layout Standard
4901 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4915 Here's how you use them:
4918 \begin_layout Itemize
4919 Put the title of your document in the
4926 \begin_layout Itemize
4927 Put the author name in the
4934 \begin_layout Itemize
4935 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4936 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4942 Note that using this environment is optional.
4943 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4944 will automatically insert today's date.
4945 If you don't want a date, use the option
4947 Suppress default date on front page
4951 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4952 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4954 \begin_inset space ~
4962 \begin_layout Standard
4963 You can use footnotes to insert
4964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4971 or contact information.
4974 \begin_layout Subsection
4976 \begin_inset Index idx
4979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4988 name "subsec:Headings"
4995 \begin_layout Standard
4996 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4998 takes care of the numbering for you.
5001 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5003 \begin_inset Index idx
5006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5007 Section headings ! Numbered
5015 \begin_layout Standard
5016 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5020 \begin_layout Enumerate
5026 \begin_layout Enumerate
5032 \begin_layout Enumerate
5038 \begin_layout Enumerate
5044 \begin_layout Enumerate
5050 \begin_layout Enumerate
5056 \begin_layout Enumerate
5062 \begin_layout Standard
5064 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5065 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5066 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5069 \begin_layout Standard
5070 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5071 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5072 You group the book into chapters.
5074 does a similar grouping:
5077 \begin_layout Itemize
5082 is divided into either
5093 \begin_layout Itemize
5105 \begin_layout Itemize
5117 \begin_layout Itemize
5129 \begin_layout Itemize
5141 \begin_layout Itemize
5153 \begin_layout Standard
5154 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5162 Not all document types use the
5166 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5171 is the top-level heading.
5179 \begin_layout Standard
5184 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5185 labels it with its number,
5186 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5188 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5200 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5202 \begin_inset Index idx
5205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5206 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5214 \begin_layout Standard
5215 The unnumbered section headings have a
5216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5223 at the end of their name.
5224 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5225 the table of contents, see section
5226 \begin_inset space ~
5230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5239 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5240 Changing the Numbering
5241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5243 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5250 \begin_layout Standard
5251 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5252 in the Table of Contents.
5253 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5255 Just as certain classes start with
5269 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5279 This is something you can change.
5282 \begin_layout Standard
5285 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5289 \begin_inset Index idx
5292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5301 \begin_inset space ~
5305 \begin_inset space ~
5310 you will see two counters.
5315 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5316 numbers a section heading.
5317 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5321 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5322 Short Titles of Headings
5323 \begin_inset Index idx
5326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5327 Section headings ! Short titles
5333 \begin_inset Argument 1
5336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5345 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5352 \begin_layout Standard
5353 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5354 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5355 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5356 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5359 \begin_layout Standard
5361 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5362 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5363 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5364 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5367 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5369 \begin_inset space ~
5375 This will insert a box labeled
5376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5380 \begin_inset space ~
5384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5387 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5388 This also works for captions inside floats.
5389 There can only be one short title per title.
5392 \begin_layout Standard
5393 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5400 \begin_layout Standard
5401 The following information applies to all section headings:
5404 \begin_layout Itemize
5405 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5408 \begin_layout Itemize
5409 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5412 \begin_layout Itemize
5413 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5416 \begin_layout Itemize
5417 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5420 \begin_layout Subsection
5424 \begin_layout Standard
5426 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5440 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5441 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5442 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5443 the text they contain.
5444 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5452 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5455 \begin_layout Standard
5456 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5465 when you start a new paragraph.
5466 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5470 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5471 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5472 have to change back to the
5476 environment yourself.
5479 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5488 \begin_inset Index idx
5491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5500 \begin_layout Standard
5501 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5502 time for the differences.
5511 are identical except for one difference:
5515 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5524 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5527 \begin_layout Standard
5528 Here's an example of the
5541 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5543 See – no indentation!
5547 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5548 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5549 the other paragraph.
5552 \begin_layout Standard
5553 Here's another example, this time in the
5560 \begin_layout Quotation
5566 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5567 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5568 the first line, then
5572 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5576 you were quoting other text.
5579 \begin_layout Quotation
5580 Here's a new paragraph.
5581 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5582 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5585 \begin_layout Standard
5586 As the examples show,
5590 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5591 They should put quotes in the
5596 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5600 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5603 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5605 \begin_inset Index idx
5608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5615 \begin_inset Index idx
5618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5634 \begin_layout Standard
5639 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5645 \begin_inset Newline newline
5648 Which I did not rehearse!
5652 It could be much worse.
5653 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5655 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5656 indented a bit more than the first.
5657 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5663 \begin_inset Newline newline
5666 And make things look fine
5667 \begin_inset Newline newline
5673 arg "newline-insert newline"
5679 \begin_layout Standard
5684 does not indent both margins.
5685 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5686 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5689 arg "newline-insert newline"
5695 \begin_layout Subsection
5697 \begin_inset Index idx
5700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5707 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5716 \begin_layout Standard
5718 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5728 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5729 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5738 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5739 lets you provide your own label.
5740 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5741 describing some general features of all four of them.
5744 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5748 \begin_layout Standard
5749 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5751 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5752 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5761 reset the environment to
5765 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5766 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5767 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5771 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5775 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5782 \begin_layout Standard
5783 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5784 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5785 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5787 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5788 you read all of section
5789 \begin_inset space ~
5793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5795 reference "sec:Nesting"
5802 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5804 \begin_inset Index idx
5807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5823 \begin_layout Standard
5824 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5828 paragraph environment.
5829 It has the following properties:
5832 \begin_layout Itemize
5833 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5837 \begin_layout Itemize
5839 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5842 \begin_layout Itemize
5843 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5847 \begin_layout Itemize
5848 The items can have any length.
5850 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5851 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5858 \begin_layout Itemize
5863 environment inside another
5867 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5871 \begin_layout Itemize
5872 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5875 \begin_layout Itemize
5877 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5880 \begin_layout Itemize
5882 \begin_inset space ~
5886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5888 reference "sec:Nesting"
5892 for a full explanation of nesting.
5896 \begin_layout Standard
5897 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5906 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5909 \begin_layout Standard
5910 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5911 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5914 \begin_layout Itemize
5915 The label for the first level
5919 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5923 \begin_layout Itemize
5924 The label for the second level is a dash.
5928 \begin_layout Itemize
5929 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5933 \begin_layout Itemize
5934 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5938 \begin_layout Itemize
5939 Back out to the third level.
5943 \begin_layout Itemize
5944 Back to the second level.
5948 \begin_layout Itemize
5949 Back to the outermost level.
5952 \begin_layout Standard
5953 These are the default labels for an
5958 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5960 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5963 dialog in the submenu
5968 \begin_inset Index idx
5971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5977 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5981 \begin_layout Standard
5982 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5983 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5985 \begin_inset space ~
5989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5991 reference "sec:Nesting"
5998 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6000 \begin_inset Index idx
6003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6012 name "sec:Enumerate"
6019 \begin_layout Standard
6024 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6025 It has these properties:
6028 \begin_layout Enumerate
6029 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6033 \begin_layout Enumerate
6034 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6038 \begin_layout Enumerate
6040 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6043 \begin_layout Enumerate
6048 environment resets the counter to one.
6051 \begin_layout Enumerate
6064 \begin_layout Enumerate
6065 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6066 Items can have any length.
6069 \begin_layout Enumerate
6070 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6073 \begin_layout Enumerate
6074 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6077 \begin_layout Enumerate
6078 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6082 \begin_layout Standard
6091 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6093 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6094 labels the four different levels in an
6101 \begin_layout Enumerate
6102 The first level of an
6106 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6110 \begin_layout Enumerate
6111 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6115 \begin_layout Enumerate
6116 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6120 \begin_layout Enumerate
6121 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6124 \begin_layout Enumerate
6125 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6130 \begin_layout Enumerate
6131 Back to the third level
6135 \begin_layout Enumerate
6136 Back to the second level.
6140 \begin_layout Enumerate
6141 Back to the outermost level.
6144 \begin_layout Standard
6145 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6149 environment, see section
6150 \begin_inset space ~
6154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6156 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6161 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6165 \begin_layout Standard
6166 There is more to nesting
6170 environments than we've stated here.
6171 You should read section
6172 \begin_inset space ~
6176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6178 reference "sec:Nesting"
6182 to learn more about nesting.
6185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6187 \begin_inset Index idx
6190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6199 \begin_layout Standard
6200 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6204 list has no fixed label.
6205 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6214 of the first line as the label.
6218 \begin_layout Description
6219 Example: This is an example of the
6226 \begin_layout Standard
6228 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6232 \begin_layout Standard
6234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6241 it is meant that the first usage of the
6245 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6247 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6255 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6260 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6261 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6263 \begin_inset space ~
6269 \begin_inset space ~
6273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6275 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6279 for more information.) Here is an example:
6282 \begin_layout Description
6284 \begin_inset space ~
6287 Example: This one shows how to use a
6290 \begin_inset space ~
6302 \begin_layout Description
6303 Usage: You should use the
6307 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6308 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6310 It's not a good idea to use a
6314 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6315 You're better off using
6327 paragraphs into them.
6330 \begin_layout Description
6331 Nesting: You can nest
6335 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6339 \begin_layout Standard
6340 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6341 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6342 them from the first line.
6345 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6347 \begin_inset Index idx
6350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6359 \begin_layout Standard
6364 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6365 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6369 \begin_layout Standard
6378 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6380 Here are its properties:
6383 \begin_layout Labeling
6384 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6386 \begin_inset space ~
6389 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6398 of each line as the item label.
6403 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6404 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6405 space as described above.
6408 \begin_layout Labeling
6409 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6410 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6411 uses different margins for the item label and the
6412 body of the item text.
6413 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6414 label width plus a little extra space.
6418 \begin_layout Labeling
6419 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6421 \begin_inset space ~
6424 width \SpecialChar LyX
6425 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6426 If the label width is larger, the label
6427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6434 into the first line.
6435 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6436 margin of the rest of the item text.
6439 \begin_layout Labeling
6440 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6442 \begin_inset space ~
6445 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6450 environment has the same left margin.
6451 \begin_inset Newline newline
6454 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6457 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6459 \begin_inset space ~
6464 dialog (toolbar button
6467 arg "layout-paragraph"
6474 \begin_inset space ~
6479 determines the default label width.
6480 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6489 multiple times instead.
6490 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6500 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6503 \begin_inset space ~
6508 every time you alter a label in a
6513 \begin_inset Newline newline
6516 The predefined default width is the length of
6517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6525 \begin_inset space ~
6531 \begin_layout Standard
6536 list the same way as the
6540 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6546 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6550 \begin_layout Standard
6555 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6556 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6558 \begin_inset space ~
6562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6564 reference "sec:Nesting"
6568 to learn about nesting.
6571 \begin_layout Standard
6572 There is yet another feature of the
6576 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6577 left-justifies the item labels by
6579 You can use additional
6583 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6584 justifies the item label.
6589 are documented in section
6590 \begin_inset space ~
6594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6596 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6601 Here are some examples:
6604 \begin_layout Labeling
6605 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6606 Left The default for
6613 \begin_layout Labeling
6614 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6615 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6622 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6625 \begin_layout Labeling
6626 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6627 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6631 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6638 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6641 \begin_layout Subsection
6643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6645 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6650 \begin_inset Index idx
6653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6662 \begin_layout Standard
6663 The features described in this section require that the module
6665 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6667 is loaded in the document settings.
6668 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6674 \begin_inset Index idx
6677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6687 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6688 Custom Enumerate Lists
6689 \begin_inset Index idx
6692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6693 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6701 \begin_layout Standard
6703 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6706 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6709 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6710 There you add the command
6713 \begin_layout Standard
6721 \begin_layout Standard
6733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6734 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6735 Code, look at section
6736 \begin_inset space ~
6740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6742 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6755 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6762 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6763 For capital Roman numerals replace
6775 in the command above.
6776 For Arabic numerals use
6784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6791 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6806 \begin_layout Standard
6808 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6816 You can only number 26
6817 \begin_inset space ~
6820 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6828 \begin_layout Standard
6829 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6830 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6833 \begin_layout Standard
6834 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6837 \begin_layout Enumerate
6838 \begin_inset Argument 1
6841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6867 \begin_layout Enumerate
6868 \begin_inset Argument 1
6871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6894 \begin_layout Enumerate
6899 \begin_layout Enumerate
6900 \begin_inset Argument 1
6903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6927 \begin_layout Enumerate
6928 \begin_inset Argument 1
6931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6957 \begin_layout Standard
6958 For this list these commands were used:
6961 \begin_layout Standard
6972 \begin_inset Newline newline
6980 \begin_inset Newline newline
6988 \begin_inset Newline newline
6998 \begin_layout Standard
7005 makes the label emphasized and
7014 \begin_layout Standard
7015 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7023 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7024 lists until you change the definition.
7032 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7034 \begin_inset Index idx
7037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7038 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7046 \begin_layout Standard
7047 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7050 \begin_layout Enumerate
7051 \begin_inset Argument 1
7054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7073 \begin_inset Note Note
7076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7077 goes back to default numbering
7085 \begin_layout Enumerate
7089 \begin_layout Standard
7093 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7097 \begin_layout Standard
7098 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7103 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7104 to indicate that it is a resumed
7105 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7106 , but in the output.
7109 \begin_layout Standard
7110 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7118 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7127 \begin_layout Standard
7128 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7130 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7131 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7132 of a normal enumeration.
7133 There, insert the command
7136 \begin_layout Standard
7142 \begin_layout Standard
7147 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7151 \begin_layout Enumerate
7155 \begin_layout Enumerate
7159 \begin_layout Standard
7160 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7163 \begin_layout Enumerate
7164 \begin_inset Argument 1
7167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7183 This enumeration starts at 4
7186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7188 \begin_inset Index idx
7191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7200 \begin_layout Standard
7201 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7203 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7206 \begin_layout Itemize
7210 \begin_layout Itemize
7211 with standard spacing
7214 \begin_layout Standard
7215 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7217 Add there the command
7221 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7224 \begin_layout Itemize
7225 \begin_inset Argument 1
7228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7247 \begin_layout Itemize
7251 \begin_layout Itemize
7255 \begin_layout Standard
7256 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7263 \begin_inset Index idx
7266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7274 For more information see its documentation,
7275 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7285 \begin_layout Standard
7286 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7288 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7289 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7293 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7296 \begin_layout Enumerate
7297 \begin_inset Argument 1
7300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7308 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7321 \begin_layout Enumerate
7322 with negative indentation
7325 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7326 Further Customization
7327 \begin_inset Index idx
7330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7331 Lists ! Customization
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 You can also change the style of description lists.
7344 \begin_layout Standard
7350 \begin_layout Standard
7351 changes the description label font, the command
7354 \begin_layout Standard
7360 \begin_layout Standard
7361 sets the list style.
7364 \begin_layout Standard
7365 An example where the command
7368 \begin_layout Standard
7373 itshape, style=nextline
7376 \begin_layout Standard
7380 \begin_layout Description
7382 \begin_inset space ~
7386 \begin_inset Argument 1
7389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7395 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7397 itshape, style=nextline
7407 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7408 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7412 \begin_layout Description
7414 \begin_inset space ~
7417 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7418 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7419 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7422 \begin_layout Standard
7423 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7429 \begin_inset Index idx
7432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7440 For more information see its documentation
7441 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7451 \begin_layout Subsection
7453 \begin_inset Index idx
7456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7465 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7467 \begin_inset space ~
7470 Address: An Overview
7473 \begin_layout Standard
7474 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7475 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7483 \begin_inset space ~
7489 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7490 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7491 gags on the document.
7492 In contrast, you can use the
7499 \begin_inset space ~
7504 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7505 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7509 \begin_layout Standard
7510 Of course, you're not limited to using
7517 \begin_inset space ~
7526 \begin_inset space ~
7531 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7532 some European academic papers.
7535 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7537 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7539 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7546 \begin_layout Standard
7551 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7552 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7556 \begin_inset space ~
7561 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7562 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7563 Here's an example of each:
7566 \begin_layout Right Address
7568 \begin_inset Newline newline
7572 \begin_inset Newline newline
7576 \begin_inset Newline newline
7579 When is it? What is today?
7582 \begin_layout Standard
7586 \begin_inset space ~
7592 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7594 the largest block of text on a single line.
7595 Here's an example of the
7602 \begin_layout Address
7604 \begin_inset Newline newline
7607 Where do I send this
7608 \begin_inset Newline newline
7611 Your post office and country
7614 \begin_layout Standard
7615 As you can see, both
7622 \begin_inset space ~
7627 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7632 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7633 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7639 This makes sense, since
7647 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7648 Thus, you have to use
7655 arg "newline-insert newline"
7660 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7661 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7663 \begin_inset space ~
7667 \begin_inset space ~
7672 ) to start a new line in an
7679 \begin_inset space ~
7687 \begin_layout Subsection
7691 \begin_layout Standard
7692 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7693 or list of references.
7695 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7698 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7700 \begin_inset Index idx
7703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7712 \begin_layout Standard
7717 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7718 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7719 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7720 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7734 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7735 The book document classes ignores the
7739 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7743 in a letter document class.
7746 \begin_layout Standard
7751 environment does several things for you.
7752 First, it puts the centered label
7753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7761 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7763 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7764 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7765 the subsequent text.
7766 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7768 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7772 \begin_layout Standard
7773 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7777 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7778 The new paragraph will still be in the
7783 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7784 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7787 \begin_layout Standard
7788 \begin_inset Float figure
7793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7795 \begin_inset Graphics
7796 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7804 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7807 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7809 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7830 \begin_layout Standard
7831 We would love to demonstrate the
7835 environment, but since this document is in the
7836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7843 class, we can't do this.
7844 We inserted it therefore as figure
7845 \begin_inset space ~
7849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7851 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7856 If you have never heard of an
7857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7864 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7867 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7869 \begin_inset Index idx
7872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7881 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7888 \begin_layout Standard
7893 environment is used to list references.
7894 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7895 only use it at the end of the document.
7907 \begin_layout Standard
7908 When you first open a
7912 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7913 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7929 depending on the document class.
7930 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7931 Each paragraph of the
7935 environment is a bibliography entry.
7940 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7941 Each new paragraph is still in the
7948 \begin_layout Standard
7949 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7950 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7952 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7954 handling, have a look at section
7955 \begin_inset space ~
7959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7961 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7968 \begin_layout Subsection
7969 Special Environments
7972 \begin_layout Standard
7974 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7975 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7978 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7983 \begin_inset Index idx
7986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7994 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7996 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8003 \begin_layout Standard
8009 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8011 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8016 key as a fixed whitespace.
8020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8033 \begin_inset space ~
8038 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8056 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8059 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8062 arg "newline-insert newline"
8079 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8080 So, when you finish using the
8085 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8086 Also, you can nest the
8091 environment inside of others.
8094 \begin_layout Standard
8095 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8098 \begin_layout Itemize
8102 arg "newline-insert newline"
8105 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8110 \begin_inset space \space{}
8120 arg "newline-insert newline"
8126 \begin_layout Itemize
8130 arg "newline-insert newline"
8140 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8146 \begin_layout Itemize
8147 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8148 You must put at least one
8152 in any line you want blank.
8153 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8157 \begin_layout Itemize
8158 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8162 since that will insert
8167 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8170 arg "self-insert \""
8176 \begin_layout Standard
8180 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8184 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8188 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8192 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8196 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8197 printf("Hello World!
8202 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8206 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8210 \begin_layout Standard
8211 This is just the standard
8212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8223 \begin_layout Standard
8229 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8231 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8232 as if you used a typewriter.
8233 \begin_inset Index idx
8236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8237 Paragraph environments|)
8242 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8245 Program Code Listings
8250 \begin_inset space ~
8258 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8262 \begin_inset Index idx
8265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8274 \begin_layout Standard
8279 environment is similar to the
8284 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8285 computer console text.
8290 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8304 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8305 you can have empty lines.
8318 \begin_layout Itemize
8319 have a certain language and a text style
8322 \begin_layout Itemize
8323 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8324 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8325 and \SpecialChar TeX
8329 \begin_layout Standard
8330 Because of these properties
8334 works like a typewriter.
8338 \begin_layout Verbatim
8342 \begin_layout Verbatim
8345 The following 2 lines are empty:
8348 \begin_layout Verbatim
8352 \begin_layout Verbatim
8356 \begin_layout Verbatim
8357 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8362 \begin_layout Standard
8367 environment is identical to
8371 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8372 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8379 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8383 \begin_layout Section
8384 Nesting Environments
8385 \begin_inset Index idx
8388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8389 Nesting ! Environments
8395 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8404 \begin_layout Subsection
8408 \begin_layout Standard
8410 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8412 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8414 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8416 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8428 \begin_layout Enumerate
8432 \begin_layout Enumerate
8437 \begin_layout Enumerate
8441 \begin_layout Enumerate
8446 \begin_layout Enumerate
8450 \begin_layout Standard
8451 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8452 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8454 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8456 \begin_inset space ~
8460 \begin_inset space ~
8468 \begin_inset space ~
8472 \begin_inset space ~
8477 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8479 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8482 arg "depth-increment"
8488 arg "depth-decrement"
8502 arg "depth-increment"
8508 arg "depth-decrement"
8512 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8513 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8517 \begin_layout Standard
8518 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8519 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8520 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8521 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8522 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8525 \begin_layout Standard
8526 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8528 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8530 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8533 \begin_layout Subsection
8534 What You Can and Can't Nest
8537 \begin_layout Standard
8538 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8539 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8542 \begin_layout Standard
8543 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8544 than a simple yes or no.
8545 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8548 \begin_layout Itemize
8549 Completely unnestable
8552 \begin_layout Itemize
8553 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8557 \begin_layout Itemize
8558 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8562 \begin_layout Standard
8563 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8564 environments have them:
8567 \begin_layout Description
8568 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8569 Can't nest into them.
8573 \begin_layout Itemize
8579 \begin_layout Itemize
8585 \begin_layout Itemize
8591 \begin_layout Itemize
8597 \begin_layout Itemize
8604 \begin_layout Description
8606 \begin_inset space ~
8609 Nestable You can nest them.
8610 You can nest other things into them.
8614 \begin_layout Itemize
8620 \begin_layout Itemize
8626 \begin_layout Itemize
8632 \begin_layout Itemize
8638 \begin_layout Itemize
8644 \begin_layout Itemize
8650 \begin_layout Itemize
8656 \begin_layout Itemize
8663 \begin_layout Itemize
8669 \begin_layout Itemize
8676 \begin_layout Description
8677 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8678 You can't nest anything into them.
8682 \begin_layout Itemize
8688 \begin_layout Itemize
8694 \begin_layout Itemize
8700 \begin_layout Itemize
8706 \begin_layout Itemize
8712 \begin_layout Itemize
8718 \begin_layout Itemize
8724 \begin_layout Itemize
8730 \begin_layout Itemize
8736 \begin_layout Itemize
8742 \begin_layout Itemize
8748 \begin_layout Itemize
8754 \begin_layout Itemize
8760 \begin_layout Itemize
8764 \begin_inset space ~
8770 \begin_layout Itemize
8777 \begin_layout Standard
8778 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8786 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8796 \begin_inset space ~
8799 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8800 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8801 nested section headings violate this.
8809 \begin_layout Subsection
8810 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8811 \begin_inset Index idx
8814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8815 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8823 \begin_layout Standard
8824 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8825 affected by nesting anyhow.
8829 \begin_layout Itemize
8833 \begin_layout Itemize
8837 \begin_layout Itemize
8841 \begin_layout Standard
8843 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8851 Figures and tables in
8855 are not affected by this.
8860 Have a look at section
8861 \begin_inset space ~
8865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8867 reference "sec:Floats"
8871 for more information about
8878 \begin_layout Standard
8880 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8881 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8885 \begin_layout Standard
8886 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8894 of its own, it behaves just like a
8895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8902 paragraph environment.
8903 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8907 \begin_layout Standard
8908 Here's an example with a table:
8911 \begin_layout Enumerate
8916 \begin_layout Enumerate
8917 This is (a) and it's nested.
8921 \begin_layout Standard
8922 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8928 \begin_layout Standard
8930 \begin_inset Tabular
8931 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8932 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8933 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8934 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9018 \begin_layout Standard
9019 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9026 \begin_layout Enumerate
9028 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9032 \begin_layout Enumerate
9036 \begin_layout Standard
9037 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9040 \begin_layout Enumerate
9045 \begin_layout Enumerate
9046 This is (a) and it's nested.
9050 \begin_layout Standard
9051 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9057 \begin_layout Standard
9059 \begin_inset Tabular
9060 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9061 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9062 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9063 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9147 \begin_layout Standard
9148 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9154 \begin_layout Enumerate
9161 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9164 \begin_layout Enumerate
9168 \begin_layout Standard
9169 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9173 \begin_layout Standard
9174 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9177 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9180 \begin_layout Enumerate
9185 \begin_layout Enumerate
9186 This is (a) and it's nested.
9189 \begin_layout Standard
9190 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9196 \begin_layout Standard
9198 \begin_inset Tabular
9199 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9200 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9201 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9202 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9287 \begin_layout Standard
9288 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9294 \begin_layout Enumerate
9296 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9303 \begin_layout Enumerate
9307 \begin_layout Standard
9308 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9314 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9315 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9319 \begin_layout Subsection
9320 Usage and General Features
9323 \begin_layout Standard
9324 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9325 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9334 is the innermost possible depth.
9335 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9338 \begin_layout Enumerate
9339 level #1 – outermost
9343 \begin_layout Enumerate
9348 \begin_layout Enumerate
9353 \begin_layout Enumerate
9358 \begin_layout Itemize
9363 \begin_layout Itemize
9372 \begin_layout Standard
9373 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9374 both of them in the example.
9375 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9385 For example, if we tried to nest another
9390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9397 , we would get errors.
9400 \begin_layout Subsection
9402 \begin_inset Index idx
9405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9414 \begin_layout Standard
9415 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9416 We have several examples of nested environments.
9417 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9421 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9422 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9425 \begin_layout Labeling
9426 \labelwidthstring MMM
9427 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9436 \begin_layout Labeling
9437 \labelwidthstring MMM
9438 #2-a This is level #2.
9439 We created it by using
9442 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9448 arg "depth-increment"
9455 \begin_layout Labeling
9456 \labelwidthstring MMM
9457 #3-a This is level #3.
9458 This time, we just enter
9465 arg "depth-increment"
9469 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9473 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9479 arg "depth-increment"
9486 \begin_layout Standard
9491 environment, nested inside of
9492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9500 So, it's at level #4.
9501 We did this by entering
9504 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9510 arg "depth-increment"
9513 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9518 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9534 \begin_layout Standard
9539 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9542 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9548 \begin_layout Labeling
9549 \labelwidthstring MMM
9550 #4-a This is level #4.
9554 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9557 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9562 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9566 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9571 keep nesting things inside
9572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9583 \begin_layout Labeling
9584 \labelwidthstring MMM
9585 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9590 \begin_layout Labeling
9591 \labelwidthstring MMM
9592 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9593 and this is level #6.
9594 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9598 \begin_layout Labeling
9599 \labelwidthstring MMM
9600 #5-b Back to level #5.
9604 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9610 arg "depth-decrement"
9617 \begin_layout Labeling
9618 \labelwidthstring MMM
9622 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9628 arg "depth-decrement"
9631 , we're back at level #4.
9635 \begin_layout Labeling
9636 \labelwidthstring MMM
9637 #3-b Back to level #3.
9638 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9642 \begin_layout Labeling
9643 \labelwidthstring MMM
9644 #2-b Back to level #2.
9649 \begin_layout Labeling
9650 \labelwidthstring MMM
9651 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9652 After this sentence, we will enter
9656 and change the paragraph environment back to
9663 \begin_layout Standard
9664 We could have also used the
9680 environment in place of the
9685 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9688 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9689 Example 2: Inheritance
9692 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9693 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9696 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9705 arg "depth-increment"
9709 \begin_inset Newline newline
9712 which, we will change to the
9720 \begin_layout Enumerate
9725 environment, at level #2.
9728 \begin_layout Enumerate
9729 Notice how the nested
9733 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9737 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9741 \begin_layout Standard
9742 We ended this example by entering
9747 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9751 and reset the nesting depth by using
9754 arg "depth-decrement"
9760 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9761 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9770 \begin_inset Argument 1
9773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9774 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9782 \begin_layout Enumerate
9783 This is level #1, in an
9787 paragraph environment.
9788 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9792 \begin_layout Enumerate
9797 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9803 arg "depth-increment"
9807 Now, what happens if we nest an
9811 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9812 label be? An asterisk?
9816 \begin_layout Itemize
9826 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9827 So, its label is a bullet.
9828 (We got here by using
9831 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9837 arg "depth-increment"
9840 , then changing the environment to
9848 \begin_layout Itemize
9849 Here's level #4, produced using
9852 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9858 arg "depth-increment"
9862 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9867 \begin_layout Enumerate
9870 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9875 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9879 , because we are in the
9887 environment (that is, it is an
9902 \begin_layout Enumerate
9907 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9908 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9912 \begin_layout Enumerate
9913 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9916 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9919 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9922 \begin_layout Enumerate
9926 arg "depth-decrement"
9929 to decrease the depth after the next
9932 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9939 \begin_layout Enumerate
9941 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9946 \begin_layout Enumerate
9948 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9949 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9953 \begin_layout Enumerate
9954 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9963 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9968 reset the counter for the label.
9972 \begin_layout Enumerate
9976 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9982 arg "depth-decrement"
9985 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9986 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9987 into the twofold-nested
9995 \begin_layout Enumerate
9996 The same thing happens if we do another
9999 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10005 arg "depth-decrement"
10008 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10011 \begin_layout Standard
10012 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10017 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10028 The number of other
10032 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10039 The same rule applies for the
10043 environment, as well.
10046 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10047 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10050 \begin_layout Enumerate
10051 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10052 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10053 the same detail with how we did it.
10062 \begin_layout Standard
10070 arg "depth-increment"
10077 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10078 the example in parentheses someplace.
10079 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10080 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10081 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10085 \begin_layout Enumerate
10090 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10094 \begin_layout Verse
10095 Now we will add verse.
10096 \begin_inset Newline newline
10099 It will get much worse.
10100 \begin_inset Newline newline
10110 arg "depth-increment"
10120 \begin_layout Verse
10121 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10122 \begin_inset Newline newline
10125 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10126 \begin_inset Newline newline
10132 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10140 \begin_layout Verse
10141 Here comes a table:
10145 \begin_layout Standard
10146 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10152 \begin_layout Standard
10154 \begin_inset Tabular
10155 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10156 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10157 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10158 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10243 \begin_layout Verse
10247 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10257 arg "depth-increment"
10263 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10269 \begin_inset Newline newline
10277 arg "depth-decrement"
10284 \begin_layout Enumerate
10289 : level #1) This is another item.
10290 Note that selecting a
10294 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10295 3 times to put the table inside the
10303 \begin_layout Quotation
10304 We're now ending the
10308 list and changing to
10313 We're still at level #1.
10314 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10315 The next set of paragraphs is a
10316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10323 We will nest both the
10330 \begin_inset space ~
10335 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10339 for the letter body.
10343 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10346 to preserve the depth.
10347 Remember that you need to use
10350 arg "newline-insert newline"
10353 to create multiple lines inside the
10360 \begin_inset space ~
10370 \begin_layout Right Address
10372 \begin_inset Newline newline
10375 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10376 \begin_inset Newline newline
10382 \begin_layout Address
10384 \begin_inset space ~
10390 \begin_layout Quotation
10391 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10395 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10396 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10397 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10398 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10399 as soon as possible.
10400 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10403 \begin_layout Quotation
10404 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10405 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10406 with your order, along with payment.
10409 \begin_layout Quotation
10410 We thank you again for your patience.
10413 \begin_layout Address
10415 \begin_inset Newline newline
10422 \begin_layout Quotation
10423 That ends that example!
10426 \begin_layout Standard
10427 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10428 gives you a lot of power with just
10430 We could have easily nested an
10451 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10454 \begin_layout Subsection
10456 \begin_inset Index idx
10459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10460 Nesting ! Separation
10466 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10468 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10475 \begin_layout Standard
10476 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10478 For example you need two different enumerations:
10481 \begin_layout Enumerate
10486 \begin_layout Enumerate
10491 \begin_layout Enumerate
10495 \begin_layout Standard
10496 \begin_inset Separator plain
10502 \begin_layout Itemize
10508 \begin_layout Standard
10509 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10515 \begin_layout Enumerate
10519 \begin_layout Enumerate
10523 \begin_layout Enumerate
10527 \begin_layout Standard
10528 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10529 list item and use the menu
10531 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10532 Start New Environment
10535 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10536 ) and behind it the new list.
10539 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10540 Start New Parent Environment
10542 only appears if the item is nested.
10543 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10547 \begin_layout Standard
10548 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10549 (red arrow in LyX).
10550 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10551 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10554 \begin_layout Standard
10555 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10558 arg "paragraph-break"
10565 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10568 \begin_layout Section
10569 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10570 \begin_inset Index idx
10573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10582 \begin_layout Standard
10583 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10584 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10586 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10587 be broken at the end of a line.
10588 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10592 \begin_layout Subsection
10594 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10596 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10601 \begin_inset Index idx
10604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10613 \begin_layout Standard
10614 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10615 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10616 ) not to break the line at
10618 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10621 \begin_layout Quote
10622 Further documentation is given in section
10623 \begin_inset Newline newline
10627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10629 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10637 \begin_layout Standard
10638 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10653 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10662 A protected space is set with
10664 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10665 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10667 \begin_inset space ~
10675 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10681 \begin_layout Subsection
10683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10685 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10690 \begin_inset Index idx
10693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10694 Spacing ! Horizontal
10702 \begin_layout Standard
10703 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10705 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10706 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10710 The length units are listed in Appendix
10711 \begin_inset space ~
10715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10717 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10724 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10726 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10728 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10733 \begin_inset Index idx
10736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10737 Spaces ! Inter-word
10745 \begin_layout Standard
10746 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10747 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10748 at the ends of sentences.
10749 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10750 automatically takes care about this.
10751 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10752 followed by a period; see section
10753 \begin_inset space ~
10757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10759 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10764 To insert a normal space, select
10766 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10767 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10769 \begin_inset space ~
10777 arg "space-insert normal"
10783 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10785 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10787 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10792 \begin_inset Index idx
10795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10804 \begin_layout Standard
10806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10813 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10822 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10823 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10824 inside abbreviations:
10827 \begin_layout Quote
10829 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10833 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10836 \begin_layout Standard
10837 or between values and units.
10838 Compare for example this:
10839 \begin_inset Newline newline
10843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10847 \begin_inset Newline newline
10850 10 kg (normal space
10853 \begin_layout Standard
10854 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10856 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10857 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10859 \begin_inset space ~
10867 arg "space-insert thin"
10873 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10877 \begin_layout Standard
10878 You can also insert the following space types:
10881 \begin_layout Description
10883 \begin_inset space ~
10887 \begin_inset space ~
10890 space A line with a
10891 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10895 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10899 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10902 negative thin space between the arrows.
10905 \begin_layout Description
10907 \begin_inset space ~
10911 \begin_inset space ~
10914 space A line with a
10915 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10919 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10923 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10926 negative medium space between the arrows.
10929 \begin_layout Description
10931 \begin_inset space ~
10935 \begin_inset space ~
10938 space A line with a
10939 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10943 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10947 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10950 negative thick space between the arrows.
10953 \begin_layout Description
10955 \begin_inset space ~
10959 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10963 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10967 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10971 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10975 \begin_inset space ~
10979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10982 em) space between the arrows.
10985 \begin_layout Description
10987 \begin_inset space ~
10991 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10995 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10999 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11003 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11007 \begin_inset space ~
11011 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11014 em) space between the arrows.
11017 \begin_layout Description
11019 \begin_inset space ~
11023 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11027 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11031 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11035 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11039 \begin_inset space ~
11043 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11046 em) space between the arrows.
11049 \begin_layout Description
11051 \begin_inset space ~
11055 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11059 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11064 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11068 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11071 cm space between the arrows.
11074 \begin_layout Standard
11076 \begin_inset space ~
11080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11082 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11086 lists the different space sizes.
11089 \begin_layout Standard
11090 \begin_inset Float table
11095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11096 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11099 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11101 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11105 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11115 \begin_inset Tabular
11116 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11117 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11118 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11119 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11207 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11231 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11235 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11239 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11263 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11287 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11302 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11315 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11343 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11358 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11371 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11392 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11394 \begin_inset Index idx
11397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11406 \begin_layout Standard
11407 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11408 feature for adding extra space
11409 in a uniform fashion.
11410 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11411 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11412 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11413 equally between themselves.
11416 \begin_layout Standard
11417 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11420 \begin_layout Quote
11422 This is on the left side
11423 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11426 This is on the right
11429 \begin_layout Quote
11432 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11436 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11442 \begin_layout Quote
11445 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11449 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11453 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11459 \begin_layout Standard
11460 That was an example in the
11466 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11470 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11474 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11477 is one in a standard paragraph.
11478 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11482 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11485 \begin_layout Standard
11486 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11489 \begin_inset space ~
11494 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11497 \begin_layout Standard
11499 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11503 \begin_inset space ~
11509 \begin_layout Standard
11511 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11515 \begin_inset space ~
11521 \begin_layout Standard
11523 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11527 \begin_inset space ~
11533 \begin_layout Standard
11535 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11539 \begin_inset space ~
11545 \begin_layout Standard
11547 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11551 \begin_inset space ~
11557 \begin_layout Standard
11559 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11563 \begin_inset space ~
11569 \begin_layout Standard
11570 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11578 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11582 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11584 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11585 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11589 option in the space dialog.
11597 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11601 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11606 \begin_inset Index idx
11609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11618 \begin_layout Standard
11619 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11620 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11623 \begin_layout Standard
11624 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11627 What is correct English?:
11628 \begin_inset Newline newline
11632 \begin_inset Newline newline
11636 \begin_inset space ~
11639 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11640 \begin_inset Newline newline
11644 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11655 \begin_inset Newline newline
11659 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11670 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11676 \begin_layout Standard
11678 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11683 \begin_inset space ~
11687 \begin_inset space ~
11691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11695 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11697 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11698 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11702 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11708 \begin_inset space ~
11712 \begin_inset space ~
11716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11719 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11728 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11729 That is why it is named
11730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11738 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11739 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11743 \begin_layout Subsection
11745 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11747 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11752 \begin_inset Index idx
11755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11764 \begin_layout Standard
11765 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11767 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11768 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11770 \begin_inset space ~
11776 There you find the following sizes:
11779 \begin_layout Standard
11792 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11793 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11798 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11800 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11801 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11803 \begin_inset space ~
11809 \begin_inset Index idx
11812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11813 Document ! Settings
11818 for the paragraph separation.
11819 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11830 \begin_layout Standard
11836 \begin_inset Index idx
11839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11845 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11846 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11851 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11852 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11861 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11870 s are described in section
11871 \begin_inset space ~
11875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11877 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11886 If there are several
11890 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11891 You can therefore use
11895 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11898 \begin_layout Standard
11903 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11904 \begin_inset space ~
11908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11910 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11917 \begin_layout Standard
11918 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11928 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11929 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11941 \begin_layout Subsection
11942 Paragraph Alignment
11943 \begin_inset Index idx
11946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11947 Paragraph ! Alignment
11955 \begin_layout Standard
11956 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11958 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11961 dialog (toolbar button
11964 arg "layout-paragraph"
11968 There are five possibilities:
11971 \begin_layout Itemize
11979 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11985 \begin_layout Itemize
11993 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11999 \begin_layout Itemize
12007 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12013 \begin_layout Itemize
12021 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12027 \begin_layout Itemize
12035 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12041 \begin_layout Standard
12042 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12043 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12044 the left and right margins.
12045 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12048 \begin_layout Standard
12050 This paragraph is right aligned,
12053 \begin_layout Standard
12055 this one is centered,
12058 \begin_layout Standard
12060 this one is left aligned.
12063 \begin_layout Subsection
12065 \begin_inset Index idx
12068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12069 Page breaks ! Forced
12075 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12077 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12084 \begin_layout Standard
12085 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12086 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12087 force a page break where you want one.
12088 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12089 is good at page breaking.
12090 Only if you use a lot of
12094 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12095 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12098 \begin_layout Standard
12099 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12100 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12104 have to change the page breaking.
12107 \begin_layout Standard
12108 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12110 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12112 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12113 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12115 \begin_inset space ~
12121 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12123 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12124 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12126 \begin_inset space ~
12131 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12133 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12134 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12137 \begin_layout Standard
12138 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12139 at the top of a page.
12140 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12142 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12143 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12144 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12148 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12152 to learn more about
12159 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12161 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12163 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12168 \begin_inset Index idx
12171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12172 Page breaks ! Clear
12180 \begin_layout Standard
12181 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12182 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12183 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12184 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12185 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12188 \begin_layout Standard
12189 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12191 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12192 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12194 \begin_inset space ~
12200 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12202 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12203 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12205 \begin_inset space ~
12209 \begin_inset space ~
12214 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12215 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12218 \begin_layout Subsection
12220 \begin_inset Index idx
12223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12232 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12239 \begin_layout Standard
12240 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12242 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12244 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12245 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12247 \begin_inset space ~
12251 \begin_inset space ~
12259 arg "newline-insert newline"
12263 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12265 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12266 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12268 \begin_inset space ~
12272 \begin_inset space ~
12280 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12283 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12285 This is useful to avoid
12286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12293 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12296 \begin_layout Standard
12297 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12298 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12300 very good at line breaking.
12301 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12302 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12303 \begin_inset space ~
12307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12309 reference "sec:Quote"
12314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12316 reference "sec:Verse"
12321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12323 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12330 \begin_layout Subsection
12332 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12334 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12339 \begin_inset Index idx
12342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12351 \begin_layout Standard
12353 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12364 \begin_layout Standard
12368 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12369 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12371 \begin_inset space ~
12376 you can insert horizontal lines.
12377 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12378 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12379 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12382 \begin_layout Standard
12384 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12395 \begin_layout Section
12396 Characters and Symbols
12399 \begin_layout Standard
12400 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12401 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12402 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12404 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12410 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12414 for information on how this is done.
12417 \begin_layout Standard
12418 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12423 dialog via the menu
12425 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12426 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12432 \begin_layout Standard
12433 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12441 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12442 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12444 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12452 \begin_layout Section
12453 Fonts and Text Styles
12454 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12456 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12463 \begin_layout Subsection
12465 \begin_inset Index idx
12468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12477 \begin_layout Standard
12478 There are two types of fonts:
12481 \begin_layout Description
12483 \begin_inset space ~
12487 \begin_inset Index idx
12490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12496 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12497 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12501 characters) in the font.
12502 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12503 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12504 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12505 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12506 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12507 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12508 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12509 \begin_inset Newline newline
12512 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12513 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12514 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12515 sizes than at small ones.
12516 \begin_inset Newline newline
12530 \begin_inset space ~
12538 \begin_layout Description
12540 \begin_inset space ~
12544 \begin_inset Index idx
12547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12553 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12554 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12555 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12556 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12557 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12558 image manipulation program.
12559 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12560 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12561 \begin_inset space ~
12564 pixels high up to 34
12565 \begin_inset space ~
12568 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12569 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12570 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12572 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12573 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12574 \begin_inset Newline newline
12577 Bitmap fonts are named
12580 \begin_inset space ~
12585 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12588 \begin_layout Standard
12589 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12590 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12591 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12592 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12593 use scalable fonts.
12596 \begin_layout Standard
12597 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12600 \begin_layout Standard
12601 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12602 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12603 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12604 font to emphasize text, you use an
12605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12613 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12615 In \SpecialChar LyX
12616 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12620 \begin_layout Subsection
12623 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12625 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12632 \begin_layout Standard
12633 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12634 used its own fonts.
12635 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12636 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12639 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12640 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12641 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12642 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12643 to a word processor.
12644 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12645 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12646 files are very portable across
12647 different machines.
12648 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12649 has increased a lot
12650 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12653 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12655 \begin_inset space ~
12659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12661 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12666 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12667 code in the document
12668 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12671 \begin_layout Standard
12672 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12673 engines that are also able directly
12674 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12676 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12678 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12680 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12681 that is installed on your system.
12682 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12685 \begin_layout Standard
12686 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12694 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12695 es; so you might have to experiment.
12703 \begin_layout Subsection
12704 Document Font and Font size
12705 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12707 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12712 \begin_inset Index idx
12715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12722 \begin_inset Index idx
12725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12734 \begin_layout Standard
12735 You can set the document fonts in the
12737 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12741 \begin_inset Index idx
12744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12745 Document ! Settings
12755 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12756 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12759 \begin_inset space ~
12768 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12770 \begin_inset space ~
12773 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12776 \begin_layout Standard
12781 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12782 This requires that you use
12794 as the output format, i.
12795 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12799 \begin_inset space \space{}
12802 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12803 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12804 installed (see section
12805 \begin_inset space ~
12809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12811 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12816 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12818 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12819 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12821 \begin_inset space ~
12824 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12825 cannot determine the family.
12826 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12827 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12830 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12833 \begin_layout Standard
12834 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12835 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12840 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12846 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12847 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12855 \begin_inset space ~
12861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12874 European Computer Modern
12877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12884 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12887 \begin_layout Standard
12896 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12897 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12902 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12905 \begin_inset space ~
12910 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12916 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12917 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12920 \begin_layout Itemize
12924 \begin_inset space ~
12929 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12942 \begin_inset space ~
12947 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12948 community in order to replace
12952 as the default font.
12953 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12954 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12957 \begin_inset space ~
12970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12971 One difference is improved kerning.
12979 \begin_layout Itemize
12983 \begin_inset space ~
12987 \begin_inset space ~
12992 fonts in (the rare) case that
12995 \begin_inset space ~
13000 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
13015 Virtual means that it
13016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13027 -glyphs from other fonts.
13028 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13050 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13056 \begin_inset Index idx
13059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13066 with the document preamble line
13067 \begin_inset Newline newline
13074 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13075 \begin_inset Newline newline
13080 will fix the guillemet problem.
13085 and that accented characters are not
13089 glyph, but built of
13093 characters, the accent and the letter.
13094 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13100 If you search for example for the French word
13101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13108 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13117 and not for the glyph
13118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13122 \begin_inset space ~
13126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13132 \begin_layout Itemize
13133 If you do not like the look of
13141 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13142 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13146 \begin_inset space ~
13152 \begin_inset space ~
13162 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13163 \begin_inset space ~
13166 serif and typewriter fonts,
13170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13171 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13172 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13178 \begin_inset space ~
13187 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13188 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13192 \begin_inset space \space{}
13200 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13204 \begin_inset space \space{}
13210 \begin_inset space ~
13218 \begin_inset space ~
13228 but you can also select your own.
13229 \begin_inset Newline newline
13232 The differences between roman,
13235 \begin_inset space ~
13244 fonts are explained in section
13245 \begin_inset space ~
13249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13251 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13256 \begin_inset Newline newline
13262 \begin_inset space ~
13267 was originally designed for newspapers.
13268 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13269 into the small newspaper columns.
13273 \begin_inset space ~
13278 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13281 \begin_layout Standard
13282 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13295 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13300 depends on the class you are using.
13301 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13304 \begin_layout Standard
13305 Note that the font size is the
13310 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13311 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13312 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13313 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13316 \begin_inset space ~
13322 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13323 \begin_inset space ~
13327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13329 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13336 \begin_layout Standard
13340 \begin_inset space ~
13345 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13347 \begin_inset space ~
13350 serif or typewriter.
13355 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13365 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13368 \begin_layout Standard
13373 LaTeX font encoding
13375 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13376 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13382 \begin_inset Index idx
13385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13393 \begin_inset space ~
13397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13399 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13404 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13405 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13412 \begin_layout Standard
13413 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13415 Use Old Style Figures
13419 Use True Small Caps
13422 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13425 Use Old Style Figures
13427 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13429 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13430 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13434 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13437 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13441 Use True Small Caps
13443 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13444 of scaled capitals.
13445 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13446 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13449 \begin_layout Standard
13454 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13455 a font to display the script characters.
13459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13460 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13466 \begin_inset Index idx
13469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13476 So this has no effect for the document language
13490 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13494 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13502 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13507 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13508 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13510 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13512 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13515 dialog, see section
13516 \begin_inset space ~
13520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13522 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13534 \begin_layout Subsection
13538 \begin_layout Standard
13539 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13540 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13542 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13543 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13544 choose a math font in the dialog
13546 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13550 \begin_inset Index idx
13553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13554 Document ! Settings
13560 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13561 automatically selects a math font.
13562 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13563 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13572 \begin_inset space ~
13578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13583 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13584 document font is available.
13587 \begin_layout Standard
13588 Note that the math font will not be used for
13592 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13598 or by the insertion of the command
13605 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13606 \begin_inset space ~
13610 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13611 while the math characters do not.
13613 \begin_inset space ~
13616 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13619 \begin_inset space ~
13627 \begin_inset space ~
13632 in the document font settings.
13635 \begin_layout Standard
13636 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13637 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13638 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13639 font (in most cases
13640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13646 \begin_inset space ~
13652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13655 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13656 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13664 \begin_inset space ~
13670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13676 \begin_layout Subsection
13677 Using Different Character Styles
13678 \begin_inset Index idx
13681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13688 \begin_inset Index idx
13691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13700 \begin_layout Standard
13701 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13702 automatically changes the character style for certain
13703 paragraph environments.
13705 supports two character styles,
13714 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13718 \begin_layout Standard
13723 style, do one of the following:
13726 \begin_layout Itemize
13727 click on the toolbar button
13736 \begin_layout Itemize
13737 use the key binding
13746 \begin_layout Standard
13747 These commands are all toggles.
13752 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13755 \begin_layout Standard
13756 One typically uses the
13760 style for proper names.
13762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13769 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13777 \begin_layout Standard
13778 A more widely used character style is the
13783 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13790 \begin_layout Itemize
13791 clicking on the toolbar button
13800 \begin_layout Itemize
13801 using the keybindings
13810 \begin_layout Standard
13815 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13817 use a different font.
13820 \begin_layout Standard
13821 We've been using the
13825 style all over the place in this document.
13826 Here's one more example:
13829 \begin_layout Quotation
13832 Do not overuse character styles!
13835 \begin_layout Standard
13836 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13837 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13838 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13839 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13843 \begin_layout Standard
13844 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13852 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13854 \begin_inset space ~
13857 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13863 arg "dialog-show character"
13869 \begin_layout Subsection
13870 Fine-Tuning with the
13875 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13877 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13882 \begin_inset Index idx
13885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13894 \begin_layout Standard
13895 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13897 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13898 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13899 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13900 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13901 from ordinary dialog.
13904 \begin_layout Standard
13905 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13906 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13907 \begin_inset Newline newline
13910 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13911 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13914 \begin_layout Standard
13915 To use custom character styles, open the
13917 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13919 \begin_inset space ~
13922 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13925 dialog or press the toolbar button
13928 arg "dialog-show character"
13932 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13933 font property that you can choose.
13934 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13937 \begin_inset space ~
13942 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13947 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13948 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13949 environments all at once.
13952 \begin_layout Standard
13953 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13956 \begin_inset space ~
13968 \begin_layout Labeling
13969 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13983 The possible options are:
13987 \begin_layout Labeling
13988 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13993 This is the Roman font family.
13994 Normally a serif font.
13995 It's also the default family.
14005 \begin_layout Labeling
14006 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14010 \begin_inset space ~
14017 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14029 \begin_layout Labeling
14030 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14037 This is the Typewriter font family.
14043 arg "font-typewriter"
14052 \begin_layout Labeling
14053 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14058 This corresponds to the print weight.
14063 \begin_layout Labeling
14064 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14069 This is the Medium font series.
14070 It's also the default series.
14073 \begin_layout Labeling
14074 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14081 This is the Bold font series.
14094 \begin_layout Labeling
14095 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14100 As the name implies.
14105 \begin_layout Labeling
14106 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14111 This is the Upright font shape.
14112 It's also the default shape.
14115 \begin_layout Labeling
14116 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14130 s the Italic font shape
14136 \begin_layout Labeling
14137 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14144 This is the Slanted font shape
14146 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14147 , this is different from italic).
14150 \begin_layout Labeling
14151 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14155 \begin_inset space ~
14162 This is the Small caps font shape
14169 \begin_layout Labeling
14170 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14175 Alters the text color.
14176 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14180 \begin_inset space ~
14185 , which means that the document default color set in
14187 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14188 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14194 \begin_inset space ~
14199 is used, you can choose between
14276 \begin_inset Index idx
14279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14288 \begin_layout Labeling
14289 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14294 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14295 the language of the document.
14296 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14297 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14299 \begin_inset Newline newline
14302 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14304 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14305 When using the spell checking (see section
14306 \begin_inset space ~
14310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14312 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14316 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14319 \begin_layout Labeling
14320 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14325 Alters the size of the font.
14326 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14327 proportional to the document font size.
14328 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14329 the details, but a general description of what
14335 \begin_layout Labeling
14336 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14357 arg "font-size tiny"
14363 \begin_layout Labeling
14364 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14385 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14391 \begin_layout Labeling
14392 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14413 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14419 \begin_layout Labeling
14420 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14441 arg "font-size small"
14447 \begin_layout Labeling
14448 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14462 It's also the default size.
14466 arg "font-size normal"
14472 \begin_layout Labeling
14473 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14494 arg "font-size large"
14500 \begin_layout Labeling
14501 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14522 arg "font-size larger"
14528 \begin_layout Labeling
14529 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14550 arg "font-size largest"
14556 \begin_layout Labeling
14557 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14578 arg "font-size huge"
14584 \begin_layout Labeling
14585 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14606 arg "font-size giant"
14612 \begin_layout Labeling
14613 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14618 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14638 arg "font-size increase"
14644 \begin_layout Labeling
14645 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14650 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14670 arg "font-size decrease"
14677 \begin_layout Standard
14682 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14683 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14685 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14686 — use those instead.
14687 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14690 \begin_layout Labeling
14691 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14696 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14701 \begin_layout Labeling
14702 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14709 This is text with emphasize on
14712 This might seem like the same as
14716 , but it is actually a bit different.
14722 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14724 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14727 \begin_layout Labeling
14728 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14735 This is text with Underbar on.
14741 arg "font-underline"
14747 \begin_inset Newline newline
14752 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14753 when you could not change fonts.
14754 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14755 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14756 because some people
14760 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14763 \begin_layout Labeling
14764 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14768 \begin_inset space ~
14775 This is text with Double underbar on.
14781 arg "font-underunderline"
14785 \begin_inset Newline newline
14788 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14789 about double underbar.
14792 \begin_layout Labeling
14793 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14797 \begin_inset space ~
14804 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14810 arg "font-underwave"
14814 \begin_inset Newline newline
14817 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14818 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14821 \begin_layout Labeling
14822 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14829 This is text with Strikeout on.
14835 arg "font-strikeout"
14839 \begin_inset Newline newline
14842 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14843 changed in the meantime.
14846 \begin_layout Labeling
14847 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14854 This is text with Noun on.
14861 , this is a logical attribute.
14862 Normally it's equivalent to
14865 \begin_inset space ~
14874 \begin_layout Standard
14875 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14876 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14878 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14880 \begin_inset space ~
14883 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14889 arg "dialog-show character"
14892 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14893 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14896 arg "textstyle-apply"
14900 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14904 \begin_layout Standard
14905 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14912 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14913 (suppose you just set the shape to
14914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14932 \begin_inset space ~
14944 \begin_layout Standard
14945 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14953 \begin_inset space ~
14965 \begin_layout Itemize
14971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14978 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14996 \begin_inset Newline newline
15000 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15014 \begin_inset Note Note
15017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15018 For more on phantoms see section
15019 \begin_inset space ~
15023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15025 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15035 \begin_inset Newline newline
15041 \begin_layout Itemize
15046 fonts use characters with serifs.
15047 These are the small
15048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15055 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15056 The following example shows the difference:
15057 \begin_inset Newline newline
15061 \begin_inset Newline newline
15066 text without serifs
15069 \begin_inset Newline newline
15072 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15073 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15080 \begin_layout Itemize
15085 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15086 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15087 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15090 \begin_layout Standard
15091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15098 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15099 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15102 \begin_inset space ~
15107 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15108 the property to be removed.
15109 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15110 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15111 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15129 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15130 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15138 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15142 \begin_inset space ~
15147 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15158 If you, for example, set
15159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15177 \begin_inset space ~
15182 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15191 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15194 \begin_layout Standard
15195 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15196 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15199 \begin_layout Section
15200 Printing and Previewing
15203 \begin_layout Subsection
15207 \begin_layout Standard
15208 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15209 using \SpecialChar LyX
15210 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15211 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15212 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15213 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15215 Additional Features
15220 \begin_layout Standard
15222 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15225 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15226 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15227 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15230 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15231 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15232 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15233 to turn your writing into printable output.
15234 This happens in two stages:
15237 \begin_layout Enumerate
15238 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15239 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15241 a file with the extension,
15242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15256 \begin_layout Enumerate
15257 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15258 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15259 to use the commands in the
15263 file to produce printable output.
15266 \begin_layout Subsection
15267 Output file formats
15268 \begin_inset Index idx
15271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15278 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15280 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15287 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15288 Simple text (ASCII)
15289 \begin_inset Index idx
15292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15293 File formats ! ASCII
15301 \begin_layout Standard
15302 This file type has the extension
15303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15315 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15319 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15326 \begin_layout Standard
15327 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15329 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15330 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15332 \begin_inset space ~
15338 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15339 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15340 bibliography (section
15341 \begin_inset space ~
15345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15347 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15352 If your document includes such material, use
15354 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15355 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15357 \begin_inset space ~
15361 \begin_inset space ~
15365 \begin_inset space ~
15373 \begin_inset space ~
15377 \begin_inset space ~
15383 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15384 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15387 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15390 \begin_inset Index idx
15393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15394 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15403 \begin_layout Standard
15404 This file type has the extension
15405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15416 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15419 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15420 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15421 -Errors or to process it manually
15422 with console commands.
15423 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15424 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15425 's temporary directory whenever you
15426 view or export your document.
15429 \begin_layout Standard
15430 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15431 -file using the menu
15433 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15434 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15438 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15439 export variants are explained in section
15440 \begin_inset space ~
15444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15446 reference "subsec:Export"
15453 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15455 \begin_inset Index idx
15458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15467 \begin_layout Standard
15468 This file type has the extension
15469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15489 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15490 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15491 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15495 \begin_layout Standard
15496 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15497 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15498 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15499 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15500 when you view the DVI.
15501 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15504 \begin_layout Standard
15505 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15507 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15508 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15513 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15514 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15516 \begin_inset space ~
15522 The latter option uses the program
15524 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15530 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15533 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15534 font access (see section
15535 \begin_inset space ~
15539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15541 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15546 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15547 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15552 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15554 \begin_inset Index idx
15557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15558 File formats ! PostScript
15566 \begin_layout Standard
15567 This file type has the extension
15568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15580 PostScript was developed by the company
15584 as a printer language.
15585 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15587 PostScript can be seen as a
15588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15591 programming language
15592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15595 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15600 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15607 \begin_inset Index idx
15610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15612 packages ! pstricks
15622 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15625 \begin_layout Standard
15626 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15630 Encapsulated PostScript
15631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15634 (EPS, file extension
15635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15647 As \SpecialChar LyX
15648 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15649 convert them in the background to EPS.
15650 If, for example, you have 50
15651 \begin_inset space ~
15654 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15656 \begin_inset space ~
15659 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15660 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15662 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15663 EPS to avoid this problem.
15666 \begin_layout Standard
15667 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15669 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15670 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15676 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15678 \begin_inset Index idx
15681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15688 \begin_inset Index idx
15691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15700 \begin_layout Standard
15701 This file type has the extension
15702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15718 Portable Document Format
15719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15726 was derived from PostScript.
15727 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15736 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15737 looks exactly the same.
15740 \begin_layout Standard
15741 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15745 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15749 (JPG, file extension
15750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15777 Portable Network Graphics
15778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15781 (PNG, file extension
15782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15794 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15795 converts them in the
15796 background to one of these formats.
15797 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15798 will slow down your workflow.
15799 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15802 \begin_layout Standard
15803 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15805 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15811 \begin_layout Description
15813 \begin_inset space ~
15816 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15820 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15823 \begin_layout Description
15825 \begin_inset space ~
15832 ) This uses the program
15834 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15837 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15840 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15843 is a new engine, derived from
15847 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15848 access (see section
15849 \begin_inset space ~
15853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15855 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15860 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15861 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15866 \begin_layout Description
15868 \begin_inset space ~
15875 ) This uses the program
15880 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15886 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15887 font access (see section
15888 \begin_inset space ~
15892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15894 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15899 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15900 vertically written Japanese.
15903 \begin_layout Description
15905 \begin_inset space ~
15908 (cropped) This is the same as
15911 \begin_inset space ~
15916 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15917 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15918 to generate good-looking
15919 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15922 \begin_layout Description
15924 \begin_inset space ~
15927 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15931 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15935 \begin_layout Description
15937 \begin_inset space ~
15940 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15944 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15945 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15949 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15950 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15953 \begin_layout Standard
15957 \begin_inset space ~
15966 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15967 works without problems.
15968 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15969 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15973 \begin_inset space ~
15981 \begin_inset space ~
15986 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15994 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15996 \begin_inset Index idx
15999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16000 FileFormats ! XHTML
16006 \begin_inset Index idx
16009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16018 \begin_layout Standard
16019 This file type has the extension
16020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16032 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16033 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16034 When \SpecialChar LyX
16035 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16036 suitable for the purpose.
16037 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16039 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16040 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16043 between different formats, which are described in section
16045 Math Output in XHTML
16050 \begin_inset space ~
16058 \begin_layout Standard
16059 XHTML output remains
16060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16067 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16068 features are supported yet.
16072 and the World Wide Web
16076 Additional Features
16078 manual, for more information.
16081 \begin_layout Standard
16082 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16084 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16085 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16091 \begin_layout Subsection
16093 \begin_inset Index idx
16096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16105 \begin_layout Standard
16106 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16107 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16116 or use the toolbar button
16123 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16124 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16125 \begin_inset space ~
16129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16131 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16135 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16137 \begin_inset space ~
16141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16143 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16148 Further output formats can be selected via
16150 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16151 View (Other Formats)
16153 or the toolbar button
16162 \begin_layout Standard
16163 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16164 viewer window using the menu
16166 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16171 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16172 Update (Other Formats)
16177 \begin_layout Standard
16178 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16181 To have a real output, export your document.
16184 \begin_layout Section
16185 A few Words about Typography
16186 \begin_inset Index idx
16189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16198 \begin_layout Subsection
16199 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16200 \begin_inset Index idx
16203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16210 \begin_inset Index idx
16213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16222 \begin_layout Standard
16223 In \SpecialChar LyX
16225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16236 character comes in four lengths: the
16248 , and the minus sign:
16249 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16255 \begin_layout Standard
16256 \begin_inset Tabular
16257 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16258 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16259 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16260 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16261 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16262 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16291 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16331 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16356 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16358 \begin_inset space ~
16361 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16368 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16393 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16395 \begin_inset space ~
16398 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16419 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16453 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16459 \begin_layout Standard
16460 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16472 character multiple times in a row.
16473 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16474 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16481 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16493 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16497 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16507 \begin_layout Standard
16508 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16509 math mode and has a length of its own.
16510 Here are some examples:
16513 \begin_layout Enumerate
16514 line- and page-breaks
16515 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16525 \begin_layout Enumerate
16527 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16537 \begin_layout Enumerate
16538 Oh — there's a dash.
16539 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16549 \begin_layout Enumerate
16550 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16554 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16564 \begin_layout Subsection
16566 \begin_inset Index idx
16569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16576 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16578 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16585 \begin_layout Standard
16586 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16587 but automatically in the output.
16588 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16594 \begin_inset Index idx
16597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16604 following the rules of the document language.
16607 \begin_layout Standard
16609 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16613 font and with unusual constructs, like
16614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16622 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16623 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16624 This is done with the menu
16626 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16627 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16629 \begin_inset space ~
16635 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16637 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16641 \begin_layout Standard
16642 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16643 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16654 would then see the hyphen
16655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16662 as a hyphenation possibility.
16663 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16664 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16665 as described in section
16667 Prevent Hyphenation
16672 \begin_inset space ~
16680 \begin_layout Subsection
16682 \begin_inset Index idx
16685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16694 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16695 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16696 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16698 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16705 \begin_layout Standard
16706 When \SpecialChar LyX
16707 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16708 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16710 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16716 appropriate amount of space.
16717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16720 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16722 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16723 gets after another word.
16726 \begin_layout Standard
16727 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16728 not work in all cases.
16730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16741 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16742 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16745 \begin_layout Standard
16746 Here are some examples of
16750 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16753 \begin_layout Itemize
16758 \begin_layout Itemize
16763 \begin_layout Standard
16764 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16767 \begin_layout Itemize
16769 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16773 this is too much space!
16776 \begin_layout Itemize
16781 \begin_layout Standard
16782 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16785 \begin_layout Standard
16786 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16789 \begin_layout Enumerate
16793 \begin_inset space ~
16798 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16799 \begin_inset space ~
16803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16805 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16810 \begin_inset Index idx
16813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16814 Spaces ! inter-word
16822 \begin_layout Enumerate
16826 \begin_inset space ~
16831 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16832 \begin_inset space ~
16836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16838 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16843 \begin_inset Index idx
16846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16855 \begin_layout Enumerate
16859 \begin_inset space ~
16863 \begin_inset space ~
16867 \begin_inset space ~
16874 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16876 \begin_inset space ~
16881 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16882 This function is also bound to
16885 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16891 \begin_layout Standard
16892 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16895 \begin_layout Itemize
16897 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16901 \begin_inset space \space{}
16904 this is too much space!
16907 \begin_layout Itemize
16908 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16912 \begin_layout Standard
16913 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16914 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16916 will take care of this.
16919 \begin_layout Standard
16920 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16924 \begin_inset space ~
16930 feature described in the section
16932 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16937 Additional Features
16942 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16944 \begin_inset Index idx
16947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16948 Typography ! Quotation marks
16954 \begin_inset Index idx
16957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16958 Quotation marks | see
16962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16988 \begin_layout Standard
16990 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
16991 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
16992 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
16994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17002 The keyboard character,
17006 , generates this automatically.
17009 \begin_layout Standard
17010 You can specify what character the
17014 key produces by using the submenu
17020 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17024 \begin_inset Index idx
17027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17028 Document ! Settings
17033 dialog and switching the
17037 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17038 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
17040 \begin_inset space ~
17046 \begin_layout Labeling
17047 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17059 \begin_inset space ~
17063 \begin_inset space ~
17067 \begin_inset Quotes els
17071 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17085 \begin_inset Quotes els
17089 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17092 quotation marks (as common, e.
17093 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17099 \begin_layout Labeling
17100 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17103 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17107 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17111 \begin_inset space ~
17115 \begin_inset space ~
17119 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17123 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17129 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17133 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17137 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17141 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17144 quotation marks (as common, e.
17145 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17151 \begin_layout Labeling
17152 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17155 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17159 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17163 \begin_inset space ~
17167 \begin_inset space ~
17171 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17175 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17181 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17185 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17189 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17193 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17196 quotation marks (as common, e.
17197 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17203 \begin_layout Labeling
17204 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17207 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17211 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17215 \begin_inset space ~
17219 \begin_inset space ~
17223 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17227 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17233 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17237 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17241 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17245 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17248 quotation marks (as common, e.
17249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17255 \begin_layout Labeling
17256 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17259 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17263 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17267 \begin_inset space ~
17271 \begin_inset space ~
17275 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17279 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17285 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17289 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17293 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17297 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17300 quotation marks (as common, e.
17301 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17304 g., in Switzerland)
17307 \begin_layout Labeling
17308 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17311 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17315 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17319 \begin_inset space ~
17323 \begin_inset space ~
17327 \begin_inset Quotes als
17331 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17337 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17341 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17345 \begin_inset Quotes als
17349 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17352 quotation marks (as common, e.
17353 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17359 \begin_layout Labeling
17360 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17363 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17367 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17371 \begin_inset space ~
17375 \begin_inset space ~
17379 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17383 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17389 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17393 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17397 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17401 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17404 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17407 \begin_layout Labeling
17408 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17411 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17415 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17419 \begin_inset space ~
17423 \begin_inset space ~
17427 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17431 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17437 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17441 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17445 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17449 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17452 quotation marks (as common, e.
17453 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17456 g., in Great Britain)
17459 \begin_layout Labeling
17460 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17463 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17467 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17471 \begin_inset space ~
17475 \begin_inset space ~
17479 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17483 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17489 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17493 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17497 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17501 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17504 quotation marks (as common, e.
17505 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17511 \begin_layout Labeling
17512 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17515 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17519 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17523 \begin_inset space ~
17527 \begin_inset space ~
17531 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17535 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17541 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17545 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17549 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17553 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17556 quotation marks (another style common in France)
17560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17561 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
17562 since these look identical to the inner marks.
17563 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
17564 the inner marks differ).
17572 \begin_layout Labeling
17573 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17576 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17580 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17584 \begin_inset space ~
17588 \begin_inset space ~
17592 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17596 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17602 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17606 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17610 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17614 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17617 quotation marks (as common, e.
17618 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17624 \begin_layout Labeling
17625 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17628 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17632 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17636 \begin_inset space ~
17640 \begin_inset space ~
17644 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17648 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17654 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17658 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17662 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17666 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17669 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
17672 \begin_layout Labeling
17673 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17674 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17682 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17688 \begin_inset space ~
17692 \begin_inset space ~
17698 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17706 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17710 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17714 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17718 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17722 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17725 quotation marks (as common, e.
17726 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17734 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
17735 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
17743 \begin_layout Labeling
17744 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17745 \begin_inset Quotes kld
17753 \begin_inset Quotes krd
17759 \begin_inset space ~
17763 \begin_inset space ~
17769 \begin_inset Quotes kls
17777 \begin_inset Quotes krs
17781 \begin_inset Quotes kld
17785 \begin_inset Quotes krd
17789 \begin_inset Quotes kls
17793 \begin_inset Quotes krs
17796 quotation marks (as common, e.
17797 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17800 g., in North Korea and China)
17804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17805 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
17806 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
17814 \begin_layout Standard
17815 Inner quotation marks
17819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17820 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
17821 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
17822 case (and specifically the British style shows that
17823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17830 does not necessarily mean
17831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17839 This is why we call them
17840 \begin_inset Quotes els
17844 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17860 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
17862 \begin_inset Quotes els
17866 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17869 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
17872 arg "quote-insert inner"
17877 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17883 \begin_layout Standard
17884 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
17885 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
17886 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
17887 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
17888 If you check the setting
17890 Use dynamic quotation marks
17894 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17895 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17898 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
17899 they appear in a special color).
17900 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
17901 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
17903 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17906 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
17909 \begin_layout Standard
17910 Individual quotation marks (i.
17911 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17914 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
17915 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
17919 \begin_layout Subsection
17921 \begin_inset Index idx
17924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17925 Typography ! Ligatures
17931 \begin_inset Index idx
17934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17963 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17965 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17972 \begin_layout Standard
17973 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17974 print them as single characters.
17975 These groups are known as
17980 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17981 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17983 Here are the standard ligatures:
17986 \begin_layout Itemize
17990 \begin_layout Itemize
17994 \begin_layout Itemize
17998 \begin_layout Itemize
18002 \begin_layout Itemize
18006 \begin_layout Standard
18007 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18010 \begin_layout Standard
18011 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18012 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18020 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18036 To break a ligature, use
18038 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18039 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18041 \begin_inset space ~
18048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18059 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18076 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18084 \begin_layout Subsection
18086 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18088 \begin_inset Index idx
18091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18099 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18101 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
18108 \begin_layout Standard
18111 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18112 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18116 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18119 \begin_layout Description
18121 The name of the game.
18124 \begin_layout Description
18126 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18130 \begin_layout Description
18132 The \SpecialChar TeX
18133 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18137 \begin_layout Description
18138 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18139 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18143 \begin_layout Standard
18144 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18150 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18158 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18159 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18160 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18161 converges to the number
18162 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18165 : The actual version is
18166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18174 , the previous one was
18175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18186 \begin_layout Subsection
18188 \begin_inset Index idx
18191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18200 \begin_layout Standard
18201 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18202 space between two words.
18203 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18213 for units use the menu
18215 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18216 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18218 \begin_inset space ~
18226 arg "space-insert thin"
18232 \begin_layout Standard
18233 Here is an example to show the differences:
18236 \begin_layout Standard
18237 \begin_inset Tabular
18238 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18239 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18240 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18241 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18248 \begin_inset space ~
18252 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18264 space between number and unit
18271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18276 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18280 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18292 half space between number and unit
18305 \begin_layout Subsection
18307 \begin_inset Index idx
18310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18311 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18319 \begin_layout Standard
18320 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18322 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18323 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18324 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18325 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18326 These bits of text became known as
18337 \begin_layout Standard
18338 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18339 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18340 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18341 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18342 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18343 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18344 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18345 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18346 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18347 \begin_inset Newline newline
18355 \begin_inset Newline newline
18363 \begin_inset Newline newline
18366 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18367 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18368 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18370 \begin_inset space ~
18374 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18376 key "latexcompanion"
18382 \begin_inset space ~
18386 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18393 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18394 's page break mechanism.
18397 \begin_layout Chapter
18398 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18399 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18401 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18408 \begin_layout Standard
18409 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18412 \begin_inset space ~
18418 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18421 \begin_layout Section
18423 \begin_inset Index idx
18426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18433 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18442 \begin_layout Standard
18444 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18447 \begin_layout Description
18450 \begin_inset space ~
18453 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18454 \begin_inset Newline newline
18458 \begin_inset Note Note
18461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18462 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18470 \begin_layout Description
18471 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18472 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18473 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18476 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18477 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18479 \begin_inset space ~
18485 \begin_inset Newline newline
18489 \begin_inset Note Comment
18492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18493 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18502 \begin_layout Description
18504 \begin_inset space ~
18507 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18508 set in the document settings under
18510 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18512 \begin_inset space ~
18518 \begin_inset Newline newline
18522 \begin_inset Newline newline
18526 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18535 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18536 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18541 of a comment that appears in the output.
18547 \begin_inset Newline newline
18551 \begin_inset Newline newline
18554 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18557 \begin_layout Standard
18558 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18566 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18570 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18573 \begin_layout Section
18575 \begin_inset Index idx
18578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18585 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18587 name "sec:Footnotes"
18594 \begin_layout Standard
18596 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18599 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18602 or the toolbar button
18605 arg "footnote-insert"
18617 \begin_inset Graphics
18618 filename clipart/footnote.png
18627 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18628 's representation of your footnote.
18638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18657 label, the box will
18661 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
18662 Clicking on the box label again will close
18675 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
18676 and click on the footnote
18691 \begin_layout Standard
18692 Here is an example footnote:
18700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18701 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
18709 \begin_layout Standard
18710 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
18711 position where the footnote box is placed.
18712 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
18713 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
18714 according to the document class.
18716 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
18717 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
18723 ey are described in the
18726 \begin_inset space ~
18734 \begin_layout Section
18736 \begin_inset Index idx
18739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18746 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18748 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
18755 \begin_layout Standard
18756 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
18758 When you insert a margin note via the menu
18760 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18762 \begin_inset space ~
18767 or the toolbar button
18770 arg "marginalnote-insert"
18789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18796 appearing within your text.
18797 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18798 's representation of your margin
18807 \begin_layout Standard
18808 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
18812 \begin_inset Marginal
18815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18817 This is a marginal note.
18825 \begin_layout Standard
18826 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
18827 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
18828 pages, right on odd pages.
18831 \begin_layout Standard
18832 For further information about marginal notes see the section
18835 \begin_inset space ~
18843 \begin_inset space ~
18851 \begin_layout Section
18852 Graphics and Images
18853 \begin_inset Index idx
18856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18863 \begin_inset Index idx
18866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18873 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18875 name "sec:Graphics"
18882 \begin_layout Standard
18883 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18884 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18887 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18892 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18896 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18899 \begin_layout Standard
18900 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18905 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18906 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18908 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18909 \begin_inset space ~
18913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18915 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18922 \begin_layout Standard
18927 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18928 of the image in the output.
18929 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18933 \begin_inset space ~
18937 \begin_inset space ~
18946 \begin_inset space ~
18950 \begin_inset space ~
18954 \begin_inset space ~
18959 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18960 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18968 \begin_layout Standard
18972 \begin_inset space ~
18976 \begin_inset space ~
18981 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18982 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18984 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18989 \begin_inset space ~
18994 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18995 with the image size is printed.
18998 \begin_layout Standard
18999 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19000 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19002 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19005 \begin_layout Standard
19007 \begin_inset Graphics
19008 filename clipart/mobius.eps
19016 \begin_layout Standard
19017 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19018 the image into a float, see section
19019 \begin_inset space ~
19023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19025 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19032 \begin_layout Subsection
19034 \begin_inset Index idx
19037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19046 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19053 \begin_layout Standard
19054 You can insert images in any known file format.
19055 But as we explained in section
19056 \begin_inset space ~
19060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19062 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19066 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19068 therefore uses the program
19072 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19073 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19074 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19075 \begin_inset space ~
19079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19081 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19088 \begin_layout Standard
19089 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19092 \begin_layout Description
19094 \begin_inset space ~
19097 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19098 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19099 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19103 Graphics Interchange Format
19104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19107 (GIF, file extension
19108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19120 \begin_inset Index idx
19123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19155 Portable Network Graphics
19156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19159 (PNG, file extension
19160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19172 \begin_inset Index idx
19175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19207 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19211 (JPG, file extension
19212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19236 \begin_inset Index idx
19239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19270 \begin_layout Description
19272 \begin_inset space ~
19275 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19277 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19278 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19279 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19280 \begin_inset Newline newline
19283 Scalable image formats can be
19284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19287 Scalable Vector Graphics
19288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19291 (SVG, file extension
19292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19304 \begin_inset Index idx
19307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19339 Encapsulated PostScript
19340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19343 (EPS, file extension
19344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19356 \begin_inset Index idx
19359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19391 Portable Document Format
19392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19395 (PDF, file extension
19396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19408 \begin_inset Index idx
19411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19426 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19427 result will not be scalable.
19428 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19434 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19442 \begin_layout Standard
19443 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19450 \begin_layout Subsection
19451 Grouping of Image Settings
19452 \begin_inset Index idx
19455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19456 Images ! Settings grouping
19464 \begin_layout Standard
19465 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19467 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19468 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19470 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19471 need to manually change each of them.
19475 \begin_layout Standard
19476 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19479 \begin_inset space ~
19483 \begin_inset space ~
19495 \begin_inset space ~
19499 \begin_inset space ~
19505 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19506 and checking the name of the desired group.
19509 \begin_layout Section
19511 \begin_inset Index idx
19514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19521 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19530 \begin_layout Standard
19531 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19534 arg "tabular-insert"
19539 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19543 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19544 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19545 from the rest of the table.
19546 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19547 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19549 Here is an example table:
19552 \begin_layout Standard
19554 \begin_inset Tabular
19555 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19556 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19557 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19558 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19559 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19560 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19760 \begin_layout Subsection
19764 \begin_layout Standard
19765 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
19768 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
19772 This brings up the table dialog.
19773 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
19774 cursor is placed currently.
19775 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
19776 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
19777 done on all of your selection.
19780 \begin_layout Standard
19781 In addition to the table dialog, the
19784 \begin_inset space ~
19789 helps you in setting table properties.
19790 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
19793 \begin_layout Standard
19797 \begin_inset space ~
19802 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19803 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19804 current cell respectively.
19805 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19807 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19808 of text, see section
19809 \begin_inset space ~
19813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19815 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
19822 \begin_layout Standard
19823 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19824 using the check box
19833 This will merge the cells to
19837 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19838 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19839 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19840 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19841 in the last row without the upper border:
19844 \begin_layout Standard
19846 \begin_inset Tabular
19847 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19848 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19849 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19850 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19851 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19852 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19863 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19872 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19948 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19983 \begin_layout Standard
19984 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19985 -arguments for the table.
19986 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19987 explained in the chapter
19994 \begin_inset space ~
20000 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20001 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20002 but are visible in the output.
20005 \begin_layout Standard
20006 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20014 Most DVI-viewers are
20018 able to display rotations.
20026 \begin_layout Standard
20031 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20036 adds lines for all cell borders.
20039 \begin_layout Subsection
20041 \begin_inset Index idx
20044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20045 Tables ! Multi-page
20051 \begin_inset Index idx
20054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20063 \begin_layout Standard
20064 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20067 \begin_inset space ~
20071 \begin_inset space ~
20079 \begin_inset space ~
20084 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20085 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20088 \begin_layout Description
20093 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20094 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20095 Except for the first page, if
20098 \begin_inset space ~
20106 \begin_layout Description
20110 \begin_inset space ~
20115 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20116 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20119 \begin_layout Description
20124 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20125 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20126 except for the last page, if
20129 \begin_inset space ~
20137 \begin_layout Description
20141 \begin_inset space ~
20146 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20147 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20150 \begin_layout Description
20151 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20152 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20154 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20158 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20161 \begin_inset space ~
20169 \begin_layout Standard
20170 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20171 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20172 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20178 In this context, first means first in this order:
20181 \begin_inset space ~
20193 \begin_inset space ~
20198 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20201 \begin_layout Standard
20203 \begin_inset Tabular
20204 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20205 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20206 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20207 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20208 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20209 <row endfirsthead="true">
20210 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20216 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20221 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20230 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20240 <row endfirsthead="true">
20241 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20252 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20261 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20273 <row endhead="true">
20274 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20285 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20294 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20304 <row endhead="true">
20305 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20316 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20325 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20337 <row endfoot="true">
20338 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20349 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20358 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20389 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21330 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21339 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21348 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21359 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21390 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21421 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21452 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21483 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21514 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21545 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21576 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21607 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21638 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21669 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21700 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21731 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21762 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21793 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21824 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21855 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21886 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21917 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21948 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21979 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22010 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22041 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22072 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22103 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22134 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22165 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22196 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22227 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22258 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22289 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22319 <row endlastfoot="true">
22320 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22331 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22340 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22357 \begin_layout Subsection
22359 \begin_inset Index idx
22362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22369 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22371 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22378 \begin_layout Standard
22379 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22380 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22381 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22382 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22386 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22389 \begin_layout Standard
22390 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22391 for the column in the table dialog.
22392 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22393 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22397 \begin_layout Standard
22399 \begin_inset Tabular
22400 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22401 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22402 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22403 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22404 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22424 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22493 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22549 This is longer now.
22554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22605 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22606 This is longer now.
22611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22637 \begin_layout Standard
22638 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
22639 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
22643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22644 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
22645 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
22651 Selection with the mouse or with
22655 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
22656 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
22657 the selection from outside the table.
22660 \begin_layout Section
22662 \begin_inset Index idx
22665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22681 \begin_layout Subsection
22685 \begin_layout Standard
22686 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
22687 have a fixed location.
22689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22696 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
22704 \begin_inset space ~
22709 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
22710 too many notes on the current page.
22713 \begin_layout Standard
22714 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
22715 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
22716 and pages without text.
22717 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
22718 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
22719 Floats are therefore numbered.
22720 Referencing is described in section
22721 \begin_inset space ~
22725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22727 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22734 \begin_layout Standard
22735 To insert a float, use the menu
22737 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22741 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
22742 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
22744 After the label you can insert the caption text.
22745 \begin_inset Index idx
22748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22754 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
22755 paragraph within the float.
22756 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
22757 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
22758 left-clicking on the box label.
22759 A closed float box looks like this:
22760 \begin_inset Graphics
22761 filename clipart/float.png
22766 – a gray button with a red label.
22769 \begin_layout Standard
22770 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
22772 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
22775 \begin_layout Subsection
22777 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22779 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22784 \begin_inset Index idx
22787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22788 Floats ! Figure floats
22796 \begin_layout Standard
22798 \begin_inset space ~
22802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22804 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22808 was created using the menu
22810 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22811 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22817 arg "float-insert figure"
22821 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22824 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22830 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22834 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22835 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22837 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22839 \begin_inset space ~
22847 arg "layout-paragraph"
22853 \begin_layout Standard
22854 \begin_inset Float figure
22859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22861 \begin_inset Graphics
22862 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22872 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22875 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22877 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22881 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22894 \begin_layout Standard
22895 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22896 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22898 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22907 ) and refer to it using the menu
22909 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22915 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22919 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22920 vague references like
22921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22928 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22929 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22939 For more about cross-references, see section
22940 \begin_inset space ~
22944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22946 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22953 \begin_layout Standard
22954 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22955 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22956 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22957 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22958 as described in section
22959 \begin_inset space ~
22963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22965 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22971 \begin_inset space ~
22975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22977 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22981 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22982 You can also set the images one below the other.
22984 \begin_inset space ~
22988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22990 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22997 reference "fig:Platypus"
23001 are the subfigures.
23004 \begin_layout Standard
23005 \begin_inset Float figure
23010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23011 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23015 \begin_inset Float figure
23020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23021 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23026 name "fig:Undefinable"
23038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23039 \begin_inset Graphics
23040 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
23051 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23055 \begin_inset Float figure
23060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23061 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23066 name "fig:Platypus"
23078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23079 \begin_inset Graphics
23080 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23092 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23099 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23102 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23104 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23108 Two distorted images.
23121 \begin_layout Subsection
23123 \begin_inset Index idx
23126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23127 Floats ! Table floats
23135 \begin_layout Standard
23136 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23138 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23139 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23142 or the toolbar button
23145 arg "float-insert table"
23149 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23150 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23151 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23153 \begin_inset space ~
23157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23159 reference "tab:Table-float"
23166 \begin_layout Standard
23167 \begin_inset Float table
23172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23173 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23176 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23178 name "tab:Table-float"
23190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23192 \begin_inset Tabular
23193 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23194 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23195 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23196 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23197 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23324 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23345 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23348 \end{array}\right]$
23356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23369 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23390 \begin_layout Subsection
23392 \begin_inset Index idx
23395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23404 \begin_layout Standard
23406 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23407 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23408 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23410 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23418 \begin_inset space ~
23426 \begin_layout Section
23428 \begin_inset Index idx
23431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23440 \begin_layout Standard
23442 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23444 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23445 \begin_inset space \space{}
23452 \begin_layout Standard
23453 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23454 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23456 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23460 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23461 and its alignment within the page.
23464 \begin_layout Standard
23466 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23476 height_special "totalheight"
23481 backgroundcolor "none"
23484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23487 This is a minipage.
23488 The text is set in an italic style.
23491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23494 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23495 another formatting.
23503 \begin_layout Standard
23504 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23507 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23511 as described in section
23512 \begin_inset space ~
23516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23518 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23523 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23529 \begin_layout Standard
23530 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23540 height_special "totalheight"
23545 backgroundcolor "none"
23548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23549 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23550 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23556 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23560 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23570 height_special "totalheight"
23575 backgroundcolor "none"
23578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23579 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23580 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23588 \begin_layout Standard
23589 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23595 \begin_layout Standard
23596 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23598 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23605 \begin_inset space ~
23613 \begin_layout Chapter
23614 Mathematical Formulas
23615 \begin_inset Index idx
23618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23625 \begin_inset Index idx
23628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23657 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23659 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
23666 \begin_layout Standard
23667 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
23672 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
23675 \begin_layout Section
23677 \begin_inset Index idx
23680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23689 \begin_layout Standard
23690 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
23703 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
23705 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
23706 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
23707 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
23709 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23715 \begin_layout Standard
23716 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
23720 \begin_inset space ~
23725 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
23728 \begin_layout Standard
23729 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
23730 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
23733 \begin_layout Standard
23734 This is a line with an inline formula
23735 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
23741 \begin_layout Standard
23742 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
23743 paragraph, like this one:
23744 \begin_inset Formula
23751 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
23754 \begin_layout Standard
23756 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
23758 For example, typing
23759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23772 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
23773 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
23777 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
23780 \begin_inset space ~
23788 \begin_layout Subsection
23789 Navigating in Formulas
23790 \begin_inset Index idx
23793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23802 \begin_layout Standard
23803 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
23804 achieved with the arrow keys.
23806 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
23807 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
23812 will leave a formula construct (a square root
23813 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
23817 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
23821 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23824 \end{array}\right]$
23832 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23837 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23838 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23841 \begin_layout Standard
23846 , printed in this document as
23847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23851 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23858 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23859 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23860 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23865 For example, if you want
23866 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23874 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23884 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23888 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23893 , since in the latter case only the
23896 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23901 will be under the square root sign:
23902 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23908 \begin_layout Standard
23909 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23911 \begin_inset Formula
23913 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23922 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23923 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23926 \begin_layout Subsection
23930 \begin_layout Standard
23931 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23932 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23936 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23937 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23938 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23939 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23940 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23944 \begin_layout Subsection
23945 Exponents and Subscripts
23946 \begin_inset Index idx
23949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23956 \begin_inset Index idx
23959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23968 \begin_layout Standard
23969 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23972 arg "math-superscript"
23978 arg "math-subscript"
23981 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23983 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23986 , type in a formula
23989 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23999 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24005 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24009 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24015 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24021 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24030 , you have to use an extra
24034 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24035 For example, if you want
24036 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24042 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24048 Subscripts are similar: To get
24049 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24055 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24063 \begin_layout Subsection
24065 \begin_inset Index idx
24068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24077 \begin_layout Standard
24078 Create a fraction either with the command
24084 or by using the icon
24087 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24093 \begin_inset space ~
24099 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24100 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24101 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24106 To move back up, press
24111 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24112 \begin_inset Formula
24114 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24117 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24125 \begin_layout Subsection
24127 \begin_inset Index idx
24130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24139 \begin_layout Standard
24140 Roots can be created using the
24143 \begin_inset space ~
24151 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24157 arg "math-insert \\root"
24179 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24185 always produces a square root.
24188 \begin_layout Subsection
24189 Operators with Limits
24190 \begin_inset Index idx
24193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24200 \begin_inset Index idx
24203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24210 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24212 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24219 \begin_layout Standard
24221 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24225 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24228 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24229 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24230 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24231 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24232 The sum operator will automatically place its
24233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24240 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24242 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24246 \begin_inset Formula
24248 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24253 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24257 \begin_layout Standard
24258 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24260 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24261 behind the operator and using the menu
24263 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24264 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24266 \begin_inset space ~
24270 \begin_inset space ~
24284 \begin_layout Standard
24285 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24294 \begin_inset Index idx
24297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24304 \begin_inset Formula
24306 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24311 which will place the
24312 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24324 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24325 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24331 \begin_layout Standard
24332 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24339 Have a look at section
24340 \begin_inset space ~
24344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24346 reference "subsec:Functions"
24350 for an explanation of function macros.
24353 \begin_layout Subsection
24355 \begin_inset Index idx
24358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24367 \begin_layout Standard
24368 Most math symbols can be found in the
24371 \begin_inset space ~
24376 under one of several categories; including
24393 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24397 \begin_layout Standard
24398 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24399 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24400 don't have to use the
24403 \begin_inset space ~
24408 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24410 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24413 \begin_layout Subsection
24415 \begin_inset Index idx
24418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24427 \begin_layout Standard
24428 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24434 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24440 \begin_inset space ~
24448 arg "math-insert \\space"
24452 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24453 For example, the sequence
24458 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24461 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24463 \begin_inset Graphics
24464 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24469 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24470 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24471 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24472 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24473 , because they are negative
24475 Here are two examples:
24478 \begin_layout Standard
24488 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24494 \begin_layout Standard
24504 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24510 \begin_layout Subsection
24512 \begin_inset Index idx
24515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24522 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24524 name "subsec:Functions"
24531 \begin_layout Standard
24535 \begin_inset space ~
24540 contains under the button
24543 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24546 a number of function macros, such as
24547 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24551 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24559 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24566 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24567 avoid confusions, because
24568 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24572 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24578 \begin_layout Standard
24579 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24581 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24585 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24591 \begin_layout Standard
24592 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24593 are placed, as described in section
24594 \begin_inset space ~
24598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24600 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24607 \begin_layout Subsection
24609 \begin_inset Index idx
24612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24621 \begin_layout Standard
24622 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
24624 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
24625 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
24626 commands, for example, to enter
24627 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24630 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
24631 Our example is entered by typing
24636 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24643 \begin_inset space ~
24647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24649 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
24653 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
24656 \begin_layout Standard
24657 \begin_inset Float table
24662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24663 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24666 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24668 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
24672 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
24680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24682 \begin_inset Tabular
24683 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
24684 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24685 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24686 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24687 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24771 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24825 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
24835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24879 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24933 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24987 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25041 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25095 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25149 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25203 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25248 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25269 \begin_layout Standard
25270 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25273 \begin_inset space ~
25281 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25284 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25288 \begin_layout Section
25289 Brackets and Delimiters
25290 \begin_inset Index idx
25293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25300 \begin_inset Index idx
25303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25310 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25312 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25319 \begin_layout Standard
25320 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25322 For some purposes, using just the keys
25327 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25328 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25329 toolbar delimiter icon
25332 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25336 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25337 \begin_inset Formula
25339 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25347 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25348 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25352 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25355 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25361 \begin_inset Formula
25363 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25371 \begin_layout Standard
25372 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25373 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25377 \begin_layout Standard
25378 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25379 left side and right side.
25380 If you use the option
25383 \begin_inset space ~
25388 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25389 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25391 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25396 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25397 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25400 \begin_layout Standard
25401 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25402 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25403 is to go inside the brackets.
25404 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25409 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25410 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25411 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25415 arg "math-delim ( )"
25421 \begin_layout Section
25422 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25423 \begin_inset Index idx
25426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25433 \begin_inset Index idx
25436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25443 \begin_inset Index idx
25446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25447 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25455 \begin_layout Standard
25456 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25460 \begin_inset space ~
25468 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25472 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25473 Here is an example:
25474 \begin_inset Formula
25476 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25485 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25486 \begin_inset space ~
25490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25492 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25497 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25498 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25499 This alignment is set in the box
25504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25553 for every column as default.
25554 For example, the sequence
25555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25566 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25567 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25568 corresponds to the relevant column.
25569 The result will look like this:
25570 \begin_inset Formula
25573 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25574 column & has & has\,right\\
25575 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25584 \begin_layout Standard
25585 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25588 arg "newline-insert newline"
25591 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25592 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25594 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25597 or the math toolbar.
25600 \begin_layout Standard
25601 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25602 It can be created with the menu
25604 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25605 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25607 \begin_inset space ~
25619 Here is an example:
25620 \begin_inset Formula
25634 \begin_layout Standard
25635 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25638 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
25641 arg "newline-insert newline"
25645 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
25650 arg "newline-insert newline"
25653 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
25654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25661 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
25662 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
25663 A new row is created by every further entry of
25666 arg "newline-insert newline"
25670 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
25671 Here is an example:
25672 \begin_inset Formula
25674 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
25675 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
25680 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
25681 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
25682 \begin_inset Formula
25684 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
25692 \begin_layout Standard
25693 The multi-line formula type described here is called
25700 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
25701 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
25702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25704 reference "eq:asquared"
25709 The other types are described in section
25710 \begin_inset space ~
25714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25716 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25723 \begin_layout Section
25724 Formula Numbering and Referencing
25725 \begin_inset Index idx
25728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25729 Math ! Formula numbering
25735 \begin_inset Index idx
25738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25739 Math ! Referencing formulas
25745 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25747 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25754 \begin_layout Standard
25755 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
25757 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25758 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25760 \begin_inset space ~
25764 \begin_inset space ~
25772 arg "math-number-toggle"
25776 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25777 within parentheses.
25778 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
25779 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
25780 the document class.
25781 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
25782 separated by a dot:
25783 \begin_inset Formula
25793 arg "math-number-toggle"
25796 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
25797 You can only number displayed formulas.
25800 \begin_layout Standard
25801 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
25803 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25804 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25806 \begin_inset space ~
25810 \begin_inset space ~
25818 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
25821 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
25822 \begin_inset Formula
25825 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
25831 To number all lines use the shortcut
25834 arg "math-number-toggle"
25840 \begin_layout Standard
25841 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25844 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25845 A label is inserted with the menu
25847 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25856 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25857 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25858 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25870 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25871 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25872 We inserted in the following example the label
25873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25880 in the second line:
25881 \begin_inset Formula
25883 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25884 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25889 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25890 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25891 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25893 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25895 \begin_inset space ~
25903 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25907 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25908 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25909 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25910 as the formula number:
25913 \begin_layout Standard
25914 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25917 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25924 \begin_layout Standard
25925 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25926 's cross-reference box are described in section
25927 \begin_inset space ~
25931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25933 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25938 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25946 \begin_layout Section
25947 User defined math macros
25948 \begin_inset Index idx
25951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25960 \begin_layout Standard
25962 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25963 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25964 Math macros are explained in section
25967 \begin_inset space ~
25979 \begin_layout Section
25983 \begin_layout Subsection
25985 \begin_inset Index idx
25988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25997 \begin_layout Standard
25998 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25999 To set a font in a formula, use the
26002 \begin_inset space ~
26010 arg "math-insert \\font"
26013 , or enter its command, listed in table
26014 \begin_inset space ~
26018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26020 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26027 \begin_layout Standard
26028 \begin_inset Float table
26033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26034 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26037 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26039 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26043 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26053 \begin_inset Tabular
26054 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26055 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26056 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26057 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26089 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26116 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26143 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26176 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26203 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26230 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26264 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26291 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26325 \begin_layout Standard
26326 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26334 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26350 \begin_layout Standard
26351 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26352 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26357 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26358 space when you need a space in the box.
26359 Here is an example where
26360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26371 denotes the set of numbers:
26372 \begin_inset Formula
26374 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26382 \begin_layout Standard
26383 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26384 You can, for example, put a character in
26393 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26397 \begin_inset Newline newline
26400 So it is better not to use this feature.
26403 \begin_layout Standard
26404 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26405 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26409 \begin_inset Newline newline
26412 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26418 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26419 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26425 \begin_layout Standard
26432 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26435 \begin_layout Standard
26436 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26438 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26439 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26441 \begin_inset space ~
26449 \begin_layout Subsection
26451 \begin_inset Index idx
26454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26463 \begin_layout Standard
26464 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26466 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26470 \begin_inset space ~
26474 \begin_inset space ~
26482 \begin_inset space ~
26490 arg "math-insert \\font"
26494 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26495 in black instead of blue.
26496 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26497 Here is an example:
26498 \begin_inset Formula
26501 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26502 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26511 \begin_layout Subsection
26513 \begin_inset Index idx
26516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26525 \begin_layout Standard
26526 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26527 automatically chosen in most situations.
26545 For most characters,
26553 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26554 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26559 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26560 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26561 thinks are appropriate.
26562 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26565 arg "math-insert \\style"
26569 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26570 For example, you can set
26571 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26574 , which is normally in
26583 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26587 The four styles are used in the following example:
26590 \begin_layout Standard
26591 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26595 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26599 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26603 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
26609 \begin_layout Standard
26610 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
26611 is set in a particular size with the menu
26613 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26615 \begin_inset space ~
26620 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
26621 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
26622 will be adjusted to correspond.
26623 As an example here is a formula in the font size
26624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26634 \begin_layout Standard
26638 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
26644 \begin_layout Section
26645 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26647 \begin_inset Index idx
26650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26657 \begin_inset Index idx
26660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26669 \begin_layout Standard
26671 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
26672 that are in common use.
26675 \begin_layout Subsection
26676 Enabling AMS-Support
26679 \begin_layout Standard
26680 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
26681 the document by selecting the checkbox
26684 \begin_inset space ~
26688 \begin_inset space ~
26692 \begin_inset space ~
26699 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26703 \begin_inset Index idx
26706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26707 Document ! Settings
26715 \begin_inset space ~
26721 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26722 -errors in formulas,
26723 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
26726 \begin_layout Subsection
26728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26730 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26735 \begin_inset Index idx
26738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26739 Math ! Multi-line Equations
26747 \begin_layout Standard
26748 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26749 provides a selection of different formula types.
26751 allows you to choose between
26772 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
26773 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26780 , for an explanation of these formula types.
26783 \begin_layout Chapter
26787 \begin_layout Section
26789 \begin_inset Index idx
26792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26799 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26801 name "sec:Cross-References"
26808 \begin_layout Standard
26809 One of \SpecialChar LyX
26810 's strengths is cross-references.
26811 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
26813 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
26814 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
26815 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
26818 \begin_layout Enumerate
26822 \begin_layout Enumerate
26823 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26825 name "enu:Second-item"
26832 \begin_layout Enumerate
26836 \begin_layout Standard
26837 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
26839 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26842 or by pressing the toolbar button
26849 A gray label box like this:
26850 \begin_inset Graphics
26851 filename clipart/label.png
26855 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26857 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26892 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26893 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26909 \begin_layout Standard
26910 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26912 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26915 or the toolbar button
26918 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26922 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26923 \begin_inset Graphics
26924 filename clipart/reference.png
26928 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26930 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26943 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26947 \begin_layout Standard
26948 As an alternative to
26950 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26953 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26958 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26959 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26961 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26973 \begin_layout Standard
26974 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26975 \begin_inset space ~
26979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26981 reference "enu:Second-item"
26988 \begin_layout Standard
26989 It is recommended to use a protected space
26993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26994 described in section
26995 \begin_inset space ~
26999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27001 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27010 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27011 line breaks between them.
27014 \begin_layout Standard
27015 There are eight formats of cross-references:
27018 \begin_layout Description
27019 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27022 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27029 \begin_layout Description
27030 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27031 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27043 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27050 \begin_layout Description
27051 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27052 \begin_inset space ~
27056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27057 LatexCommand pageref
27058 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27065 \begin_layout Description
27067 \begin_inset space ~
27071 \begin_inset space ~
27074 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27076 LatexCommand vpageref
27077 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27082 \begin_inset Newline newline
27085 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27086 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27087 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27088 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27089 it prints “on the next page”.
27090 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27093 \begin_layout Description
27095 \begin_inset space ~
27099 \begin_inset space ~
27103 \begin_inset space ~
27106 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27109 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27114 \begin_inset Newline newline
27117 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27123 ; otherwise it behaves like
27127 \begin_inset space ~
27131 \begin_inset space ~
27140 \begin_layout Description
27142 \begin_inset space ~
27145 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27146 \begin_inset Newline newline
27150 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27158 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27168 \begin_inset Index idx
27171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27173 packages ! prettyref
27179 \begin_inset Index idx
27182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27184 packages ! refstyle
27195 \begin_inset Newline newline
27198 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27199 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27202 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27206 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27207 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27215 is the default and preferred because
27219 supports only English documents.
27220 The format is specified by using the command
27232 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27233 preamble of the document.
27234 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27252 \begin_inset Newline newline
27259 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27264 \begin_inset Newline newline
27275 predefines reference formats for all available types.
27276 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27278 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27279 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27284 , you might do so as follows:
27285 \begin_inset Newline newline
27292 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
27297 \begin_inset Newline newline
27300 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
27301 the package documentation
27302 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27304 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27310 \begin_inset Newline newline
27321 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
27328 \begin_layout Description
27330 \begin_inset space ~
27333 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27335 LatexCommand nameref
27336 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27343 \begin_layout Description
27345 \begin_inset space ~
27348 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27349 label for the reference:
27350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27351 LatexCommand labelonly
27352 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27357 \begin_inset Newline newline
27360 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
27361 Code, if you want to issue a command
27362 that \SpecialChar LyX
27368 , then you may want to use the
27371 \begin_inset space ~
27376 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
27378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27386 This is the form needed for e.
27387 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27391 \begin_inset space \space{}
27398 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
27399 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27401 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27405 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27409 \begin_layout Standard
27410 You can only use the style
27414 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27418 is always possible.
27421 \begin_layout Standard
27422 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27423 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27425 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27426 \begin_inset space ~
27430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27432 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27439 \begin_layout Standard
27440 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27444 \begin_inset space ~
27448 \begin_inset space ~
27453 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27454 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27457 \begin_inset space ~
27462 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27463 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27466 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27472 \begin_layout Standard
27473 You can change labels at any time.
27474 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27475 do not need to think about this.
27478 \begin_layout Standard
27479 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27481 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27485 \begin_layout Standard
27486 References are described in detail in the section
27487 \begin_inset space ~
27497 \begin_inset space ~
27505 \begin_layout Section
27506 Table of Contents and other Listings
27507 \begin_inset Index idx
27510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27517 \begin_inset Index idx
27520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27521 Navigating ! Outline
27527 \begin_inset Index idx
27530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27537 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27546 \begin_layout Subsection
27548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27550 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27557 \begin_layout Standard
27558 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27560 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27561 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27563 \begin_inset space ~
27567 \begin_inset space ~
27573 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27575 If you click on it, the
27579 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27580 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27581 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27583 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27585 \begin_inset space ~
27590 that is described in section
27591 \begin_inset space ~
27595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27597 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27604 \begin_layout Standard
27605 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
27606 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
27608 \begin_inset space ~
27612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27614 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
27618 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
27620 \begin_inset space ~
27624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27626 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
27630 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
27632 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
27635 \begin_layout Subsection
27636 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
27637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27639 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
27646 \begin_layout Standard
27647 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
27649 You can insert them via the
27651 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27655 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
27658 \begin_layout Section
27659 URLs and Hyperlinks
27660 \begin_inset Index idx
27663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27670 \begin_inset Index idx
27673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27682 \begin_layout Subsection
27684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27693 \begin_layout Standard
27694 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
27696 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27702 \begin_layout Standard
27703 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
27705 \begin_inset Flex URL
27708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27718 \begin_layout Standard
27719 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
27725 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
27729 \begin_layout Standard
27730 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27738 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27747 \begin_layout Subsection
27749 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27751 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
27758 \begin_layout Standard
27759 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
27761 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27764 or with the toolbar button
27771 The appearing dialog has two fields:
27780 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
27781 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
27782 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27784 name "LyX's homepage"
27785 target "http://www.lyx.org"
27790 , an Email address like this:
27791 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27793 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
27794 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
27800 , or a link to a file.
27803 \begin_layout Standard
27804 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
27806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27817 to the link target.
27820 \begin_layout Standard
27821 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
27822 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
27823 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
27824 the text style dialog.
27825 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
27829 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27831 name "LyX's homepage"
27832 target "http://www.lyx.org"
27840 \begin_layout Standard
27841 The link text color can be changed, when the option
27845 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
27847 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27848 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27852 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
27854 \begin_inset Newline newline
27862 \begin_inset Newline newline
27869 in the PDF Properties dialog.
27872 \begin_layout Section
27874 \begin_inset Index idx
27877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27884 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27886 name "sec:Appendices"
27893 \begin_layout Standard
27894 Appendices are created with the menu
27896 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27898 \begin_inset space ~
27902 \begin_inset space ~
27908 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
27909 as the appendix part of the book.
27910 This part is marked with a red borderline.
27913 \begin_layout Standard
27914 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
27915 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
27916 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
27917 and the subsection number.
27918 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
27922 \begin_layout Standard
27924 \begin_inset space ~
27928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27930 reference "chap:Credits"
27935 \begin_inset space ~
27939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27941 reference "subsec:Export"
27948 \begin_layout Section
27950 \begin_inset Index idx
27953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27960 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27962 name "sec:Bibliography"
27969 \begin_layout Standard
27970 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
27972 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
27973 \begin_inset space ~
27977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27979 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27986 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
27991 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
27992 \begin_inset space ~
27996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27998 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28003 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28004 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
28005 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
28009 using a bibliography database.
28012 \begin_layout Standard
28013 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28014 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28018 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28019 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28020 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28021 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28022 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28025 \begin_layout Subsection
28026 The Bibliography Environment
28027 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28029 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28036 \begin_layout Standard
28041 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28043 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28052 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28054 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28055 of ASCII characters only.
28059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28061 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28064 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
28070 \begin_inset Newline newline
28074 \begin_inset Flex URL
28077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28079 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
28091 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28101 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28104 \begin_layout Standard
28105 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28107 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28110 or the toolbar button
28113 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28117 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28118 containing the available citations.
28119 Select one or more keys from the list and
28129 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28130 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28134 \begin_layout Standard
28135 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
28136 entry with surrounding brackets.
28141 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
28142 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28154 \begin_layout Standard
28158 Companion Second Edition
28161 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28163 key "latexcompanion"
28171 \begin_layout Standard
28172 The \SpecialChar LyX
28173 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28174 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28184 \begin_layout Standard
28185 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28192 \begin_inset Index idx
28195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28203 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28215 Author A and Author B(Year)
28216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28223 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28225 Then, if you select
28228 \begin_inset space ~
28233 in the document settings
28234 \begin_inset Index idx
28237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28238 Document ! Settings
28245 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28247 \begin_inset space ~
28253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28255 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28262 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28265 \begin_layout Standard
28266 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28269 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28271 \begin_inset space ~
28279 arg "layout-paragraph"
28283 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28286 \begin_layout Subsection
28287 Bibliography databases
28288 \begin_inset Index idx
28291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28292 Bibliography ! Databases
28298 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28300 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28307 \begin_layout Standard
28308 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
28313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28314 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28316 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28317 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28322 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28324 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28325 your working field in a database.
28326 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28327 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28328 list for that document.
28329 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28333 \begin_layout Standard
28334 The database is a text file with the file extension
28335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28346 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28347 The format is explained in
28348 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28355 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28357 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28359 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28365 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28366 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28367 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28369 \begin_inset Flex URL
28372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28374 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28382 \begin_layout Standard
28384 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
28385 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28386 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
28388 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
28390 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
28391 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
28392 Those are addressed by
28397 \begin_inset Index idx
28400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28402 packages ! biblatex
28408 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28409 (although it has been significantly
28410 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28420 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28421 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28422 might conversely fail to correctly
28423 handle databases that use specific
28432 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
28436 \begin_layout Standard
28437 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28442 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
28444 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28448 \begin_inset Index idx
28451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28452 Document ! Settings
28464 \begin_inset space ~
28469 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28477 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28478 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28480 \begin_inset Index idx
28483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28484 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28493 \begin_layout Standard
28494 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28497 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28502 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28504 \begin_inset space ~
28510 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
28511 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28519 Add bibliography to TOC
28521 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28526 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28527 in the document or just the cited references.
28530 \begin_layout Standard
28531 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28532 style file is a text file with the file extension
28533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28544 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
28545 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28546 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
28547 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
28549 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
28554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28555 For information on how this is done, have a look at
28556 \begin_inset Newline newline
28560 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28562 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
28572 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28577 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
28581 \begin_layout Standard
28582 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
28585 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28587 \begin_inset Index idx
28590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28591 Bibliography ! Biblatex
28597 \begin_inset Index idx
28600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28602 packages ! biblatex
28610 \begin_layout Standard
28611 Accessing a database via
28615 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28618 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28623 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28625 \begin_inset space ~
28631 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28632 you cannot select a
28637 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28641 \begin_layout Standard
28646 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
28648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28659 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
28660 file (text file with the file extension
28661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28672 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
28673 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
28675 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
28679 \begin_layout Standard
28684 styles are not set in the
28687 \begin_inset space ~
28692 dialog, but in the document settings.
28693 \begin_inset Index idx
28696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28697 Document ! Settings
28702 However, in the dialog in the
28706 field, which is only visible if you use
28710 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
28711 example how its heading will appear).
28712 These options are deescribed in detail in the
28717 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28727 \begin_layout Standard
28728 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
28729 \begin_inset space ~
28733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28735 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28745 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28746 Bibliography Processors
28749 \begin_layout Standard
28750 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
28751 uses a bibliography processor,
28752 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
28753 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
28754 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28756 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
28757 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
28760 \begin_layout Standard
28761 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
28763 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
28764 You can do this on a general level in
28766 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
28767 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
28768 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
28771 or for individual documents in
28773 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28774 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28778 The following variants are available by default:
28781 \begin_layout Description
28782 biber a specific, modern processor
28783 \begin_inset Index idx
28786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28793 developed exclusively for
28797 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28803 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
28808 makes use of; if you use the
28812 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
28819 \begin_layout Description
28820 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
28821 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
28822 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
28826 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
28829 \begin_layout Description
28830 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
28831 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
28835 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
28839 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
28843 features are supported.
28846 \begin_layout Standard
28847 By default (with the
28853 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28854 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28867 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
28868 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
28869 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
28872 ), \SpecialChar LyX
28873 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
28886 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28887 -based bibliography styles).
28888 This should suit most needs.
28891 \begin_layout Standard
28892 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
28893 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
28894 (in \SpecialChar LyX
28899 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28900 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
28901 You can adjust it in
28903 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
28904 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
28905 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
28911 \begin_layout Standard
28912 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
28913 can add below the selection.
28914 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
28915 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28921 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28931 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28935 \begin_layout Standard
28937 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
28939 These are explained in detail in section
28941 Customizing Bibliographies
28945 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28950 Additional Features
28955 \begin_layout Subsection
28957 \begin_inset Index idx
28960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28961 Bibliography ! Citation format
28967 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28969 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
28976 \begin_layout Standard
28977 Many different citation formats are common, e.
28978 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28982 \begin_inset space \space{}
28985 numerical citation (as
28986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28993 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
28994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29001 ) or author-year citations (as
29002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29011 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29015 \begin_layout Standard
29016 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
29019 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29020 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29024 \begin_inset Index idx
29027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29028 Document ! Settings
29033 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
29039 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29040 labels, is there to use
29043 \begin_inset space ~
29054 \begin_inset space ~
29059 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29062 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29069 \begin_layout Standard
29070 With a bibliography database (see
29071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29073 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29080 ) one has in contrary to the
29084 environment full access to the formatting styles.
29085 These style formats are available:
29088 \begin_layout Description
29090 \begin_inset space ~
29093 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29094 -based approached without any additional packages
29095 (simple numeric citations).
29098 \begin_layout Description
29099 Biblatex loads the package
29104 \begin_inset Index idx
29107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29109 packages ! biblatex
29114 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
29116 Biblatex citation style
29120 Biblatex bibliography style
29123 Options to the package
29127 can be entered in the
29134 \begin_layout Description
29136 \begin_inset space ~
29140 \begin_inset space ~
29143 mode) loads the package
29147 with the natbib compatibility mode.
29148 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
29160 behavior very closely.
29165 this option has some additional styles.
29170 styles are also supported by this variant.
29173 \begin_layout Description
29175 \begin_inset space ~
29178 (BibTeX) loads the package
29183 \begin_inset Index idx
29186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29193 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29196 \begin_layout Description
29198 \begin_inset space ~
29201 (BibTeX) loads the package
29206 \begin_inset Index idx
29209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29216 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
29219 \begin_layout Standard
29228 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29230 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
29239 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29241 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29242 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
29244 Biblatex citation style
29247 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
29253 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29257 \begin_layout Standard
29258 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29259 are available in the
29264 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
29265 a name prefix such as
29266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29281 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29282 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29286 \begin_inset space \space{}
29290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29301 \begin_layout Standard
29302 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
29304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29308 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
29310 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29323 Here is a simple example where the text
29324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29328 \begin_inset space ~
29332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29335 appears after the reference:
29338 \begin_layout Quote
29340 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29343 key "latexcompanion"
29351 \begin_layout Standard
29352 All styles except for
29356 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
29358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29366 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
29370 \begin_layout Standard
29371 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
29372 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
29373 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
29378 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
29379 multi-citation (so-called
29380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29383 qualified citation lists
29384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29390 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
29395 dialog will display three columns in the field
29402 \begin_inset space ~
29410 \begin_inset space ~
29418 \begin_inset space ~
29424 If you double-click on an item's
29427 \begin_inset space ~
29435 \begin_inset space ~
29440 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
29443 General text before
29449 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
29452 \begin_layout Section
29454 \begin_inset Index idx
29457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29464 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29473 \begin_layout Standard
29474 An index entry is created if you use the menu
29476 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29478 \begin_inset space ~
29483 or the toolbar button
29490 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
29491 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
29492 by \SpecialChar LyX
29493 as the index entry.
29496 \begin_layout Standard
29497 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
29499 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29500 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29502 \begin_inset space ~
29508 A light blue box labeled
29509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29520 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
29521 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
29525 \begin_layout Standard
29526 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
29527 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
29528 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
29529 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29531 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29533 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
29541 \begin_layout Subsection
29542 Grouping Index Entries
29543 \begin_inset Index idx
29546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29555 \begin_layout Standard
29556 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
29558 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
29559 lists under the entry
29560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29568 First we create the entry
29569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29577 \begin_inset space ~
29581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29583 reference "subsec:Lists"
29588 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
29589 \begin_inset space ~
29593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29595 reference "sec:Itemize"
29599 , we insert the command
29602 \begin_layout Standard
29608 \begin_layout Standard
29612 \begin_layout Standard
29618 \begin_layout Standard
29619 for the enumerated list in section
29620 \begin_inset space ~
29624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29626 reference "sec:Enumerate"
29633 \begin_layout Standard
29634 The exclamation mark
29635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29642 marks the grouping levels.
29643 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
29644 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
29645 If we don't have an index entry for
29646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29653 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
29656 \begin_layout Subsection
29658 \begin_inset Index idx
29661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29662 Index ! Page ranges
29670 \begin_layout Standard
29671 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
29673 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
29674 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
29675 an index entry in section
29676 \begin_inset space ~
29680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29682 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
29689 \begin_layout Standard
29692 Paragraph environments|(
29695 \begin_layout Standard
29696 and another entry at the end of section
29697 \begin_inset space ~
29701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29703 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
29710 \begin_layout Standard
29713 Paragraph environments|)
29716 \begin_layout Standard
29718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29741 respectively start and end the index range.
29742 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
29743 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
29744 the pages of the indexed document parts.
29745 An example is the index entry
29746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29749 Document ! Settings
29750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29756 \begin_layout Subsection
29758 \begin_inset Index idx
29761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29762 Index ! Cross referencing
29770 \begin_layout Standard
29771 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
29772 We referred for example in the index entry
29773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29781 \begin_inset space ~
29785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29787 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
29791 ) to the index entry
29792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29799 in the same section using the entry
29802 \begin_layout Standard
29805 GIF|see{Image formats}
29808 \begin_layout Standard
29809 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
29811 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
29812 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
29815 \begin_layout Subsection
29817 \begin_inset Index idx
29820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29821 Index ! Entry order
29829 \begin_layout Standard
29830 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
29831 follow the rules for the index order.
29832 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
29837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29838 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
29840 \begin_inset space ~
29844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29846 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
29855 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
29856 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
29857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29881 \begin_inset Index idx
29884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29885 Dummy entries ! maïs
29891 \begin_inset Index idx
29894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29895 Dummy entries ! maître
29901 \begin_inset Index idx
29904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29905 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
29910 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
29911 maïs, maison, maître.
29912 To achieve this, we use the command
29915 \begin_layout Standard
29918 previous entry@current entry
29921 \begin_layout Standard
29922 In our case we want to have
29923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29938 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
29941 \begin_layout Standard
29947 \begin_layout Standard
29948 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
29949 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
29951 See the next subsection for an example.
29954 \begin_layout Standard
29955 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29961 \begin_layout Standard
29962 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
29967 to generate the index (see section
29968 \begin_inset space ~
29972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29974 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
29983 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29984 -package aeguill in section
29985 \begin_inset space ~
29989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29991 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
29995 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
29996 -packages although all these index
29997 commands start with
29998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30011 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
30016 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
30019 \begin_layout Standard
30031 \begin_layout Standard
30043 \begin_layout Subsection
30045 \begin_inset Index idx
30048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30049 Index ! Entry layout
30057 \begin_layout Standard
30058 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30059 \begin_inset Index idx
30062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30065 This is an italic dummy entry
30070 You can also format the page number using the character
30071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30078 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30079 -command without a backslash.
30080 We can write for example
30083 \begin_layout Standard
30086 italic page number:|textit
30089 \begin_layout Standard
30090 to get the page number in italic.
30091 \begin_inset Index idx
30094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30095 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30100 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30101 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30119 \begin_inset space ~
30125 Have a look at section
30126 \begin_inset space ~
30130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30132 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30136 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30140 \begin_layout Standard
30141 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30149 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30153 to generate the index, see section
30154 \begin_inset space ~
30158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30160 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30169 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30174 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30175 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30178 key "latexcompanion"
30191 \begin_layout Standard
30192 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30194 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30195 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30196 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30197 If so, put the following in the preamble
30200 \begin_layout Standard
30212 \begin_layout Standard
30216 \begin_layout Standard
30222 \begin_layout Standard
30223 in the index entry.
30224 \begin_inset Index idx
30227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30228 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30233 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30234 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30235 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30238 \begin_layout Standard
30239 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30240 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30241 a bold font for all index entries.
30242 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30254 documentation for details,
30255 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30257 key "makeindex,xindy"
30265 \begin_layout Subsection
30267 \begin_inset Index idx
30270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30277 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30279 name "subsec:Index-Program"
30286 \begin_layout Standard
30287 If the index generation program
30291 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
30292 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
30296 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30297 distribution, is used.
30301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30306 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
30307 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
30308 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
30309 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
30310 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
30320 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
30322 dialog, see section
30323 \begin_inset space ~
30327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30329 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30334 The available options are listed and explained in
30335 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30337 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
30343 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
30347 \begin_layout Standard
30348 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
30349 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
30352 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30353 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30357 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
30358 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
30361 \begin_layout Subsection
30365 \begin_layout Standard
30366 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
30367 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
30368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30375 next to the standard index.
30377 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
30378 that add this feature.
30385 \begin_inset Index idx
30388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30390 packages ! splitidx
30395 package to generate multiple indexes.
30396 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
30401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30402 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
30404 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30412 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30413 style, but it also includes
30414 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
30415 Please consult the package's manual for details.
30423 \begin_layout Standard
30424 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
30425 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
30427 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30428 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30431 and select the option
30433 Use multiple Indexes
30440 already contains the standard index
30441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30449 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
30450 also appear as a heading) to the
30454 input field and press the
30459 The new index now also appears in the list.
30460 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
30461 label color to the new index.
30464 \begin_layout Standard
30465 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
30468 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30475 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
30476 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
30477 are additional features:
30480 \begin_layout Itemize
30481 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
30482 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
30485 \begin_layout Itemize
30486 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
30487 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
30488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30495 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
30496 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
30497 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
30498 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
30501 \begin_layout Section
30502 Nomenclature/Glossary
30503 \begin_inset Index idx
30506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30513 \begin_inset Index idx
30516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30545 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30547 name "sec:Nomenclature"
30554 \begin_layout Standard
30555 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
30556 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
30557 called nomenclature or glossary.
30560 \begin_layout Standard
30561 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30568 \begin_inset Index idx
30571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30579 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
30581 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30588 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30592 \begin_layout Standard
30593 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
30594 and then use the menu
30596 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30602 \begin_inset space ~
30607 or the toolbar button
30610 arg "nomencl-insert"
30615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30626 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
30629 \begin_layout Standard
30630 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
30631 The first is the term or
30635 that you wish to define.
30640 of the term or symbol.
30643 \begin_layout Standard
30644 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30652 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
30653 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
30661 \begin_layout Subsection
30662 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
30663 \begin_inset Index idx
30666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30667 Nomenclature ! Layout
30675 \begin_layout Standard
30676 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
30680 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
30683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30687 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
30691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30695 \begin_inset Newline newline
30703 \begin_inset Newline newline
30709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30716 character starts/ends the formula.
30717 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30718 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
30720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30730 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
30740 \begin_layout Standard
30741 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30742 -syntax is given in section
30743 \begin_inset space ~
30747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30749 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30756 \begin_layout Standard
30760 \begin_inset space ~
30765 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
30767 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
30768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30772 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
30776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30779 in this document is:
30780 \begin_inset Newline newline
30785 dummy entry for the character
30790 \begin_inset Newline newline
30802 \begin_inset space ~
30812 font use the command
30841 \begin_layout Standard
30842 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
30843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30847 \begin_inset space \space{}
30851 \begin_inset Newline newline
30867 \begin_inset Newline newline
30870 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
30871 This command will make the font of all symbols
30878 \begin_inset space ~
30886 \begin_layout Standard
30887 If the characters |
30888 \begin_inset space \space{}
30892 \begin_inset space \space{}
30896 \begin_inset space \space{}
30900 \begin_inset space \space{}
30904 \begin_inset space \space{}
30907 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
30908 a quote character in front of them.
30909 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
30910 LatexCommand nomenclature
30911 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
30912 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
30920 \begin_layout Subsection
30921 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
30922 \begin_inset Index idx
30925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30926 Nomenclature ! Sort order
30934 \begin_layout Standard
30935 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30936 -code of the symbol
30938 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
30940 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
30943 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
30944 LatexCommand nomenclature
30946 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
30954 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
30958 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
30959 LatexCommand nomenclature
30962 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
30968 They will be sorted by
30969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30995 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
30998 will be sorted before the
31002 since the character
31003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31010 is considered in sorting.
31013 \begin_layout Standard
31014 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31017 \begin_inset space ~
31022 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31023 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31025 For the example given, you can insert
31029 in this field for the
31030 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31037 will be located before
31038 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31044 \begin_layout Standard
31045 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31050 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31060 \begin_layout Subsection
31061 Nomenclature Options
31062 \begin_inset Index idx
31065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31066 Nomenclature ! Options
31074 \begin_layout Standard
31079 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31080 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31083 \begin_layout Description
31084 refeq Appends the phrase
31085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31100 to every nomenclature entry, where
31106 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31109 \begin_layout Description
31110 refpage Appends the phrase
31111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31126 to every nomenclature entry, where
31132 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31135 \begin_layout Description
31136 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31139 \begin_layout Standard
31140 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31141 class options list in the
31143 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31147 In this document the options
31154 \begin_layout Standard
31155 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31161 \begin_layout Standard
31162 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31163 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31168 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31171 \begin_layout Description
31181 \begin_layout Description
31184 nomrefpage Like the
31191 \begin_layout Description
31194 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31203 \begin_layout Description
31207 \begin_inset space ~
31213 \begin_inset space ~
31218 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31221 \begin_layout Standard
31223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31230 are automatically translated for some document languages.
31231 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31235 \begin_layout Standard
31243 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
31246 \begin_inset Newline newline
31253 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
31258 \begin_inset Newline newline
31262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31277 by their translation.
31280 \begin_layout Subsection
31281 Printing the Nomenclature
31282 \begin_inset Index idx
31285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31286 Nomenclature ! Printing
31294 \begin_layout Standard
31295 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
31297 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31298 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31314 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
31315 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
31316 You can choose between these settings:
31319 \begin_layout Description
31320 Default a space of 1
31321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31327 \begin_layout Description
31329 \begin_inset space ~
31333 \begin_inset space ~
31336 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
31339 \begin_layout Description
31340 Custom custom space
31343 \begin_layout Standard
31344 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
31345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31353 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
31361 For example, in order to change the name to
31365 , add the following line to the preamble:
31368 \begin_layout Standard
31376 nomname}{List of Symbols}
31379 \begin_layout Subsection
31380 Nomenclature Program
31381 \begin_inset Index idx
31384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31385 Nomenclature ! Program
31391 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31393 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
31400 \begin_layout Standard
31406 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31407 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
31409 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
31414 by adding options, see section
31415 \begin_inset space ~
31419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31421 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31426 The available options are listed and explained in
31427 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31429 key "nomencl,makeindex"
31437 \begin_layout Section
31439 \begin_inset Index idx
31442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31449 \begin_inset Index idx
31452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31453 Document ! Branches
31459 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31461 name "sec:Branches"
31468 \begin_layout Standard
31469 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
31470 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
31471 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
31472 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
31475 \begin_layout Standard
31476 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
31477 allows you to put text into branches.
31478 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
31479 To create a branch, either select the menu
31481 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31482 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
31485 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
31487 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31494 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
31495 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
31496 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
31497 and whether the name of the branch should
31498 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
31499 (see below for an example).
31500 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
31501 to the name of the other) and to add
31502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31510 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31514 \begin_inset space ~
31517 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
31518 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
31521 \begin_layout Standard
31522 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
31523 These boxes are inserted via the menu
31525 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31528 where you can choose a branch.
31529 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
31533 \begin_layout Standard
31534 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
31535 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
31538 \begin_layout Standard
31539 \begin_inset Branch Question
31543 \begin_layout Standard
31548 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
31556 \begin_layout Standard
31557 \begin_inset Branch Answer
31561 \begin_layout Standard
31566 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
31574 \begin_layout Standard
31581 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31582 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31585 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
31586 Consider for example a file
31587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31594 which has the above branches.
31596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31603 is active, the PDF export file would be called
31604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31627 branch were inactive,
31628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31643 branch was active, likewise
31644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31659 branch was active, and
31660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31663 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
31664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31667 if both branches were active.
31668 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
31669 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31675 \begin_layout Standard
31676 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
31682 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
31683 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
31687 \begin_inset space ~
31695 \begin_layout Standard
31696 \begin_inset Branch Answer
31700 \begin_layout Standard
31706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31713 branch is deactivated.
31719 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31725 \begin_layout Standard
31726 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
31727 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
31728 definitions for each branch.
31729 For example you can define for the question branch
31733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31734 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31735 -syntax, see section
31736 \begin_inset space ~
31740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31742 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31754 \begin_layout Standard
31764 \begin_layout Standard
31774 \begin_layout Standard
31775 and for the answer branch
31778 \begin_layout Standard
31788 \begin_layout Standard
31798 \begin_layout Standard
31799 \begin_inset Branch Question
31803 \begin_layout Standard
31807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31835 \begin_layout Standard
31836 \begin_inset Branch Answer
31840 \begin_layout Standard
31844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31872 \begin_layout Standard
31873 Now it is possible to use the
31877 question{\SpecialChar ldots
31884 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
31887 commands to obtain conditional output.
31888 Here is an example formula where only the
31895 \begin_inset Formula
31897 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
31905 \begin_layout Standard
31906 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
31914 \begin_layout Standard
31915 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
31917 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31921 \begin_inset space \space{}
31924 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
31926 For this advanced usage, see the
31932 Flex insets and InsetLayout
31937 \begin_layout Section
31939 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31941 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
31946 \begin_inset Index idx
31949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31958 \begin_layout Standard
31961 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31962 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31965 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
31967 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31973 \begin_inset Index idx
31976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31978 packages ! hyperref
31983 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
31984 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
31985 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
31986 part of the document.
31990 \begin_layout Standard
31991 The header information in the dialog tab
31995 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
31996 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
31997 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
31998 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32002 \begin_inset space ~
32006 \begin_inset space ~
32011 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32012 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32013 and author entries.
32017 \begin_inset space ~
32021 \begin_inset space ~
32025 \begin_inset space ~
32030 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32033 \begin_layout Standard
32034 You can specify in the dialog tab
32038 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32043 \begin_inset space ~
32047 \begin_inset space ~
32051 \begin_inset space ~
32056 option allows long links to be split;
32059 \begin_inset space ~
32063 \begin_inset space ~
32067 \begin_inset space ~
32075 \begin_inset space ~
32080 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32083 \begin_inset space ~
32088 colors the different links.
32089 The default colors are:
32092 \begin_layout Labeling
32093 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32098 for hyperlinks and URLs
32101 \begin_layout Labeling
32102 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32110 \begin_layout Labeling
32111 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32119 \begin_layout Standard
32120 but you can change these in the field
32125 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32128 \begin_layout Standard
32131 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32134 \begin_layout Standard
32139 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32140 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32141 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32144 \begin_layout Standard
32149 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32150 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32151 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32161 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32162 when opening the PDF.
32164 \begin_inset space ~
32167 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32168 \begin_inset space ~
32171 1 will only display the sections.
32174 \begin_layout Standard
32175 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32176 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32182 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32183 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32193 \begin_layout Section
32195 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32197 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32199 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32206 \begin_layout Subsection
32209 \begin_inset Index idx
32212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32220 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32222 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32229 \begin_layout Standard
32230 As \SpecialChar LyX
32231 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32232 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32233 commands and constructs,
32236 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32237 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32238 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32239 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32240 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32241 cannot support all packages and
32245 \begin_layout Standard
32246 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
32247 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
32248 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
32252 Code box is created by the menu
32254 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32256 \begin_inset space ~
32261 or by the toolbar button
32274 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
32282 \begin_layout Standard
32283 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
32285 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
32287 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
32291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32292 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
32297 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32304 , you can write the command part
32310 in a \SpecialChar TeX
32311 Code box before the word and the closing brace
32315 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
32316 Code box behind the word.
32317 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
32318 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
32322 \begin_layout Standard
32323 \begin_inset Graphics
32324 filename clipart/ERT.png
32332 \begin_layout Standard
32336 \begin_layout Standard
32337 This is a line with a
32341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32364 \begin_layout Standard
32365 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32373 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32374 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
32375 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
32376 know that the command is finished.
32384 \begin_layout Subsection
32385 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32387 \begin_inset Argument 1
32390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32391 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32398 \begin_inset Index idx
32401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32409 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32411 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32418 \begin_layout Standard
32419 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
32420 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32421 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
32422 uses in the background.
32423 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
32424 is based on commands, you can
32425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32433 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
32434 any time if you know the right commands.
32435 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
32436 is the end of the day.
32437 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
32438 all caption labels bold.
32439 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
32441 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
32445 \begin_layout Standard
32446 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
32448 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32450 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32453 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32463 \begin_layout Standard
32464 As result you find that the package
32469 \begin_inset Index idx
32472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32480 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
32482 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32485 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32489 \begin_inset space ~
32497 \begin_layout Standard
32502 usepackage[options]{package name}
32505 \begin_layout Standard
32506 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
32507 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
32508 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
32509 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
32512 \begin_layout Standard
32513 In your case the package name is
32518 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
32523 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
32524 So you add the command
32527 \begin_layout Standard
32532 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
32535 \begin_layout Standard
32536 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
32540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32541 For more commands provided by the
32545 package, have a look at its documentation,
32546 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32561 \begin_layout Standard
32562 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
32564 For example if you use a
32568 class, you don't need the package
32572 , you can instead write
32575 \begin_layout Standard
32580 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
32585 \begin_layout Standard
32586 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
32587 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
32588 documentation of the document class you want to use.
32595 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
32598 \begin_layout Standard
32599 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
32600 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
32602 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32603 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
32604 Code box as described in the previous
32608 \begin_layout Standard
32609 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
32610 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32613 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32615 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
32623 \begin_layout Standard
32624 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
32630 \begin_layout Standard
32634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32644 \begin_inset Note Note
32647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32648 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
32656 \begin_layout Left Header
32657 \begin_inset Argument 1
32660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32680 \begin_inset Note Note
32683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32684 defines the header line as described below
32692 \begin_layout Center Header
32693 \begin_inset Argument 1
32696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32705 \begin_layout Right Header
32706 \begin_inset Argument 1
32709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32730 \begin_layout Left Footer
32731 \begin_inset Argument 1
32734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32755 \begin_layout Center Footer
32756 \begin_inset Argument 1
32759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32771 \begin_inset Newline newline
32775 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
32781 \begin_layout Right Footer
32782 \begin_inset Argument 1
32785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32807 \begin_layout Section
32808 Customized Page Headers and Footers
32809 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32811 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
32816 \begin_inset Index idx
32819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32820 Document ! Header/Footer line
32826 \begin_inset Index idx
32829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32838 \begin_layout Standard
32839 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
32843 \begin_inset space ~
32854 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32860 \begin_inset space ~
32866 As a second step add in the menu
32868 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32869 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32878 Custom Header/Footerlines
32881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32885 This module offers the following 6
32886 \begin_inset space ~
32892 \begin_layout Description
32894 \begin_inset space ~
32898 \begin_inset space ~
32902 \begin_inset space ~
32906 \begin_inset space ~
32910 \begin_inset space ~
32916 \begin_layout Description
32918 \begin_inset space ~
32922 \begin_inset space ~
32926 \begin_inset space ~
32930 \begin_inset space ~
32934 \begin_inset space ~
32940 \begin_layout Standard
32941 for the different positions in the header/footer.
32942 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
32945 \begin_layout Standard
32946 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
32947 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
32949 \begin_inset space ~
32953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32955 reference "fig:Page-layout"
32959 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
32962 \begin_layout Standard
32963 \begin_inset Float figure
32969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32972 \begin_inset Tabular
32973 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
32974 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
32975 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
32976 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
32977 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
32979 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
32991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32997 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33008 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33026 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33037 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33041 The normal text on the page goes here.
33042 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33044 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33045 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33050 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33059 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33070 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33088 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33099 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33117 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33135 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33138 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33140 name "fig:Page-layout"
33144 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33157 \begin_layout Standard
33158 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33166 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33170 \begin_inset space ~
33175 is set to “Default”.
33176 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33185 \begin_layout Subsection
33189 \begin_layout Standard
33190 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33191 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33192 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33193 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33195 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33197 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33200 \begin_layout Standard
33201 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33202 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33206 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33208 \begin_inset space ~
33216 \begin_layout Description
33219 thepage prints the current page number
33222 \begin_layout Description
33225 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33228 \begin_layout Description
33231 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33234 \begin_layout Description
33237 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33238 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33245 \begin_inset Quotes prd
33248 because it usually goes in a left header.
33251 \begin_layout Description
33254 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
33255 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
33257 It is normally used in the right header.
33260 \begin_layout Subsection
33261 Default header/footer
33264 \begin_layout Standard
33265 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
33266 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
33267 footer has the page number.
33268 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
33269 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
33270 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
33273 \begin_inset space ~
33281 \begin_layout Subsection
33285 \begin_layout Standard
33286 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
33287 Some pages are different.
33288 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
33289 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
33290 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
33291 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
33292 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
33295 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33296 Header and footer decoration line
33299 \begin_layout Standard
33300 By default, you get a 0.4
33301 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33304 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
33305 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
33317 in the following way:
33320 \begin_layout Standard
33327 headrulewidth}{thickness}
33330 \begin_layout Standard
33331 where thickness is a size in standard units like
33344 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
33345 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33351 \begin_layout Standard
33352 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33354 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
33355 \begin_inset space ~
33359 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33369 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33370 Several header/footer lines
33373 \begin_layout Standard
33374 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
33375 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
33376 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
33378 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33393 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33394 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33396 \begin_inset space ~
33404 \begin_layout Standard
33411 headheight}{height}
33414 \begin_layout Standard
33419 is a size in standard units (e.
33420 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33424 \begin_inset space \space{}
33432 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
33433 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
33434 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33435 logfile with the menu
33437 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33439 \begin_inset space ~
33447 \begin_inset space ~
33452 to see if you can find a warning about the package
33457 \begin_inset Index idx
33460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33462 packages ! fancyhdr
33468 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
33469 for your header/footer.
33472 \begin_layout Subsection
33476 \begin_layout Standard
33477 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
33478 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
33479 This example consists of the following definition:
33482 \begin_layout Description
33484 \begin_inset space ~
33493 , empty optional argument
33496 \begin_layout Description
33498 \begin_inset space ~
33501 Header empty, empty optional argument
33504 \begin_layout Description
33506 \begin_inset space ~
33515 in the optional argument
33518 \begin_layout Description
33520 \begin_inset space ~
33529 in the optional argument
33532 \begin_layout Description
33534 \begin_inset space ~
33547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33551 \begin_inset Newline newline
33555 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33562 in the optional argument
33565 \begin_layout Description
33567 \begin_inset space ~
33576 , empty optional argument
33579 \begin_layout Description
33582 headrulewidth set to 2
33583 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33589 \begin_layout Standard
33590 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
33591 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
33597 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33607 \begin_layout Standard
33608 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33614 \begin_layout Standard
33618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33622 pagestyle{headings}
33628 \begin_inset Note Note
33631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33632 switches back to page style with the default headings
33640 \begin_layout Section
33641 Previewing Snippets of your Document
33642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33644 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
33649 \begin_inset Index idx
33652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33659 \begin_inset Index idx
33662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33671 \begin_layout Standard
33673 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
33674 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
33675 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
33678 \begin_layout Subsection
33682 \begin_layout Standard
33683 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33689 \begin_inset Index idx
33692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33694 packages ! preview-latex
33699 (on some systems named simply
33704 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33706 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33713 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33715 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
33723 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
33724 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33725 -package are automatically
33726 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
33730 \begin_layout Subsection
33734 \begin_layout Standard
33735 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
33736 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
33738 activate the option
33741 \begin_inset space ~
33748 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33754 \begin_inset space ~
33758 \begin_inset space ~
33761 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
33768 \begin_inset space ~
33781 \begin_inset space ~
33786 is the multiplication factor for the size.
33789 \begin_layout Standard
33790 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
33795 \begin_inset space ~
33803 \begin_inset space ~
33811 \begin_layout Standard
33812 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
33813 and when you finish
33817 \begin_layout Standard
33818 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33826 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
33827 generated by activating the option
33830 \begin_inset space ~
33836 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
33844 \begin_layout Subsection
33845 Selected document parts
33848 \begin_layout Standard
33849 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
33850 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
33851 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
33852 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
33854 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
33856 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33860 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
33861 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
33862 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
33865 \begin_layout Standard
33866 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33873 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
33878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33885 is explained in section
33887 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
33892 \begin_inset space ~
33902 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
33903 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
33904 the final rotated boxes,
33905 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
33906 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
33908 Here is the result:
33911 \begin_layout Standard
33912 \begin_inset Preview
33914 \begin_layout Standard
33919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33923 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
33929 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
33939 height_special "totalheight"
33944 backgroundcolor "none"
33947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33972 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
33978 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
33985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34000 \begin_layout Standard
34001 Previewing works also for colors.
34002 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34021 is explained in section
34028 \begin_inset space ~
34041 \begin_layout Standard
34042 \begin_inset Preview
34044 \begin_layout Standard
34048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34067 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34072 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34091 \begin_layout Standard
34092 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34098 \begin_layout Standard
34099 If \SpecialChar LyX
34100 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34101 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34102 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34103 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34104 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34105 the \SpecialChar TeX
34107 If \SpecialChar LyX
34108 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34109 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34111 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34112 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34113 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34116 \begin_layout Subsection
34121 \begin_layout Standard
34122 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34123 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34126 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34128 \begin_inset space ~
34133 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34135 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34137 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34138 's main window, then only this selection
34139 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34140 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34141 the source view window.
34146 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34147 ; but note that if you have
34148 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34150 not just the one which is open at the time.
34153 \begin_layout Section
34154 Advanced Find and Replace
34155 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34157 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34162 \begin_inset Index idx
34165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34172 \begin_inset Index idx
34175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34184 \begin_layout Subsection
34188 \begin_layout Standard
34189 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34190 allows for searching of complex,
34191 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34193 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34194 The key-features are:
34197 \begin_layout Itemize
34198 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34199 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34200 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34204 \begin_layout Itemize
34205 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34206 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34207 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34208 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34211 \begin_layout Itemize
34212 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34213 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34214 outside of mathematics environments
34217 \begin_layout Itemize
34218 Search may be widened to a specific
34223 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34227 \begin_inset space ~
34230 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34231 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34238 \begin_layout Itemize
34239 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34240 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34241 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34245 \begin_inset space ~
34248 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
34251 \begin_layout Subsection
34255 \begin_layout Standard
34256 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
34258 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34271 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
34274 ) or the toolbar button
34277 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
34283 Advanced Find and Replace
34288 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34292 \begin_layout Standard
34298 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
34302 \begin_inset space ~
34307 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
34310 arg "paragraph-break"
34314 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
34315 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
34319 arg "paragraph-break"
34322 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
34326 searches backwards.
34329 \begin_layout Standard
34333 \begin_inset space ~
34338 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
34347 \begin_inset space ~
34352 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
34355 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34356 Searching for mathematics
34359 \begin_layout Standard
34360 Mathematical formulas, such as
34361 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
34364 or something more complex like
34365 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
34368 , may be searched for by typing them in the
34373 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
34374 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
34375 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
34376 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
34382 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34386 \begin_layout Standard
34387 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
34388 This is done by switching to the
34392 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
34397 This way, entering in the
34404 \begin_layout Itemize
34405 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
34406 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
34409 \begin_layout Itemize
34410 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
34411 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
34414 \begin_layout Itemize
34415 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
34416 of it only within section headings.
34417 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
34418 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
34422 \begin_layout Itemize
34423 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
34424 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
34427 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34431 \begin_layout Standard
34432 The entries made in the
34436 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
34439 \begin_inset space ~
34445 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
34449 button or alternatively press
34452 arg "paragraph-break"
34459 while the cursor is in the
34462 \begin_inset space ~
34470 \begin_layout Standard
34471 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
34473 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
34477 \begin_layout Itemize
34478 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
34479 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
34480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34487 with its typewriter version
34488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34502 \begin_layout Itemize
34503 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
34505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34509 \begin_inset Formula $R$
34513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34521 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
34525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34528 (you may want to enable the
34531 \begin_inset space ~
34539 \begin_inset space ~
34544 options and disable the
34552 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
34553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34560 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
34561 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
34565 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
34568 , or occurrences of
34569 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
34573 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
34579 \begin_layout Subsection
34583 \begin_layout Standard
34584 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
34588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34589 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
34591 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34593 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
34603 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
34609 This is done with the context menu
34611 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34612 Insert Regular Expression
34614 while the cursor is in the
34619 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
34620 expression matching rules
34624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34625 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
34628 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34632 \begin_inset space ~
34635 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
34636 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
34642 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
34643 same text in the document.
34644 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
34645 Examples of using such a feature may be:
34648 \begin_layout Enumerate
34649 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
34654 editor the fraction
34655 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
34659 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
34662 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
34663 fractions with the given denominator.
34666 \begin_layout Enumerate
34667 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
34679 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
34684 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
34685 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
34686 Also, by inserting a
34687 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
34690 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
34691 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
34694 \begin_layout Standard
34695 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
34696 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
34697 \begin_inset Formula $()$
34700 , and referring back to them through
34701 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
34705 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
34709 For example, try searching with the regexp
34710 \begin_inset Newline newline
34713 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
34716 \begin_inset Newline newline
34719 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
34722 \begin_layout Standard
34723 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
34726 \begin_layout Standard
34727 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34735 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
34736 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
34737 sub-expressions is absolute.
34739 \begin_inset space ~
34743 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
34746 always refers to the first occurrence of
34747 \begin_inset Formula $()$
34750 in all entered regexps.
34758 \begin_layout Section
34760 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34762 name "sec:Spellchecking"
34767 \begin_inset Index idx
34770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34779 \begin_layout Standard
34781 has a built-in spell checker.
34784 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34791 key or the toolbar button
34794 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
34797 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
34798 beginning of the currently selected text.
34799 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
34800 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
34801 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
34802 scrolled so that it is visible.
34803 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
34804 n, if any could be found.
34805 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
34809 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
34810 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
34813 \begin_layout Standard
34814 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
34817 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34821 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
34822 a different one at the top of the dialog.
34824 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
34825 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
34828 \begin_inset space ~
34836 arg "dialog-show character"
34839 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
34841 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
34844 \begin_layout Standard
34845 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34846 can be downloaded from here:
34847 \begin_inset Newline newline
34851 \begin_inset Flex URL
34854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34856 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
34862 \begin_inset Newline newline
34866 \begin_inset space ~
34869 files for each language.
34870 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
34871 \begin_inset space ~
34874 files into \SpecialChar LyX
34875 's installation subfolder
34883 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
34885 \begin_inset Newline newline
34888 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
34889 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
34890 but in most cases these are
34906 is the language code.
34909 \begin_layout Subsection
34913 \begin_layout Standard
34916 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34917 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34919 \begin_inset space ~
34922 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34925 you can set the following things:
34928 \begin_layout Description
34930 \begin_inset space ~
34933 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
34934 should use for spell checking.
34935 Depending on your platform,
34949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34950 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
34951 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
34966 \begin_inset space ~
34969 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
34972 \begin_layout Description
34974 \begin_inset space ~
34977 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
34978 will always use the given language
34979 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
34982 \begin_layout Description
34984 \begin_inset space ~
34987 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
34989 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34993 \begin_inset space \space{}
34997 This should normally not be needed.
35000 \begin_layout Description
35002 \begin_inset space ~
35006 \begin_inset space ~
35009 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35021 \begin_layout Description
35023 \begin_inset space ~
35026 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35027 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35028 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35029 appear in a context menu.
35030 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35034 \begin_layout Description
35036 \begin_inset space ~
35040 \begin_inset space ~
35044 \begin_inset space ~
35047 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35051 \begin_layout Section
35053 \begin_inset Index idx
35056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35065 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35072 \begin_layout Standard
35074 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35075 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35085 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35087 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35097 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35099 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35100 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35101 which are available for many languages.
35104 \begin_layout Standard
35105 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35106 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35110 \begin_layout Subsection
35111 Setting up the thesaurus
35114 \begin_layout Standard
35123 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35127 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35132 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35134 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35138 \begin_inset space ~
35146 For instance, the US English files are named:
35149 \begin_layout Itemize
35153 \begin_layout Itemize
35157 \begin_layout Standard
35166 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35167 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35170 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35171 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35172 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35174 \begin_inset space ~
35179 ) to the path where they are installed.
35183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35184 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35185 ies, typical locations are
35191 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35195 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35199 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35202 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35208 LibreOffice-<Version>
35215 On the Mac, the default location is
35217 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35218 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35219 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35220 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35221 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35222 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35230 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35231 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35232 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35236 \begin_layout Standard
35237 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35238 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35242 \begin_layout Itemize
35243 \begin_inset Flex URL
35246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35248 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
35256 \begin_layout Standard
35257 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
35258 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
35260 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35261 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35262 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35264 \begin_inset space ~
35269 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35271 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
35272 and point \SpecialChar LyX
35276 \begin_layout Standard
35277 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
35279 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35282 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
35288 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
35291 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
35292 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
35294 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35300 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35301 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35302 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35304 \begin_inset space ~
35309 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
35312 \begin_layout Subsection
35313 Using the thesaurus
35316 \begin_layout Standard
35317 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
35319 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35322 or the toolbar button
35325 arg "thesaurus-entry"
35328 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
35330 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
35332 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
35333 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
35334 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
35343 ), related terms (such as
35346 \begin_inset space ~
35355 ), compounds (such as
35358 \begin_inset space ~
35367 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
35376 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
35379 \begin_layout Standard
35380 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
35381 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
35385 \begin_layout Standard
35386 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
35387 the dictionary, such as the above
35391 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
35392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35396 \begin_inset space \space{}
35399 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
35400 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
35401 For example, looking up the word form
35405 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
35410 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
35411 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35415 \begin_inset space \space{}
35426 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
35427 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
35428 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
35431 \begin_layout Section
35433 \begin_inset Index idx
35436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35443 \begin_inset Index idx
35446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35447 Document ! Change Tracking
35453 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35455 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
35462 \begin_layout Standard
35463 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
35464 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
35465 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
35466 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
35468 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35470 \begin_inset space ~
35473 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35475 \begin_inset space ~
35483 \begin_layout Standard
35484 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
35498 The color depends on the author that made the change.
35499 You can change the color in
35501 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35502 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35504 \begin_inset space ~
35508 \begin_inset space ~
35513 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35519 \begin_inset Index idx
35522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35523 Color ! Change tracking
35528 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
35529 's status bar when the
35530 cursor is in changed text.
35531 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
35534 arg "changes-merge"
35540 \begin_layout Standard
35541 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
35543 \begin_inset Index idx
35546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35555 \begin_layout Standard
35556 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35562 \begin_layout Standard
35563 \begin_inset Graphics
35564 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
35572 \begin_layout Standard
35573 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35579 \begin_layout Standard
35580 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
35583 \begin_layout Standard
35584 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35590 \begin_layout Standard
35591 \begin_inset Tabular
35592 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
35593 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
35594 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
35595 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
35596 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35605 arg "changes-track"
35613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35619 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35621 \begin_inset space ~
35624 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35626 \begin_inset space ~
35635 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35644 arg "changes-output"
35652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35658 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35660 \begin_inset space ~
35663 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35665 \begin_inset space ~
35669 \begin_inset space ~
35673 \begin_inset space ~
35682 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35703 Jumps to the next change
35709 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35718 arg "change-accept"
35726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35732 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35734 \begin_inset space ~
35737 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35739 \begin_inset space ~
35748 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35757 arg "change-reject"
35765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35771 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35773 \begin_inset space ~
35776 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35778 \begin_inset space ~
35787 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35796 arg "changes-merge"
35804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35810 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35812 \begin_inset space ~
35815 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35817 \begin_inset space ~
35826 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35835 arg "all-changes-accept"
35843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35849 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35851 \begin_inset space ~
35854 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35856 \begin_inset space ~
35860 \begin_inset space ~
35869 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35878 arg "all-changes-reject"
35886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35892 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35894 \begin_inset space ~
35897 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35899 \begin_inset space ~
35903 \begin_inset space ~
35912 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35935 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35936 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
35938 \begin_inset space ~
35947 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35970 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
35972 \begin_inset space ~
35988 \begin_layout Standard
35989 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35995 \begin_layout Standard
35996 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36016 \begin_layout Standard
36017 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36018 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36019 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36020 the next change after the current cursor position.
36021 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36022 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36023 step to the next change.
36024 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36027 \begin_layout Standard
36028 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36029 to describe a change.
36032 \begin_layout Standard
36033 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36039 \begin_inset Index idx
36042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36050 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36052 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36059 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36063 \begin_layout Section
36064 Comparison of Documents
36065 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36067 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36072 \begin_inset Index idx
36075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36076 Comparison of documents
36084 \begin_layout Standard
36085 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36088 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36092 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36093 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36095 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36097 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36101 \begin_inset space ~
36105 \begin_inset space ~
36109 \begin_inset space ~
36118 \begin_inset space ~
36122 \begin_inset space ~
36126 \begin_inset space ~
36130 \begin_inset space ~
36134 \begin_inset space ~
36138 \begin_inset space ~
36143 enables the change tracking option
36146 \begin_inset space ~
36150 \begin_inset space ~
36154 \begin_inset space ~
36159 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36162 \begin_layout Section
36163 International Support
36164 \begin_inset Index idx
36167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36168 International support
36176 \begin_layout Standard
36177 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36178 with any language you want.
36179 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36180 up \SpecialChar LyX
36182 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36184 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
36192 \begin_layout Standard
36193 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36194 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36195 \begin_inset space ~
36199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36201 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36208 \begin_layout Subsection
36210 \begin_inset Index idx
36213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36220 \begin_inset Index idx
36223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36224 Document ! Settings
36230 \begin_inset Index idx
36233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36234 Document ! Language
36242 \begin_layout Standard
36245 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36246 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36249 dialog lets you set
36251 the language, the quote style and character encoding
36256 \begin_layout Standard
36261 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
36266 \begin_inset space ~
36271 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
36272 For details about the different encoding options see section
36273 \begin_inset space ~
36277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36279 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
36286 \begin_layout Subsection
36287 Keyboard mapping configuration
36288 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36290 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
36297 \begin_layout Standard
36298 If you have for example a U.
36299 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36302 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
36303 can use an alternate keymap.
36304 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
36309 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36310 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36311 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
36314 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
36315 \begin_inset space ~
36319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36321 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
36326 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
36327 which one you want to use.
36330 \begin_layout Standard
36331 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
36332 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
36333 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
36334 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36337 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
36338 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
36339 one to support the characters you want.
36340 This and many other customizations are explained in the
36347 \begin_layout Chapter
36350 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36352 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
36359 \begin_layout Standard
36360 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
36361 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
36362 topic inside the user's guide.
36365 \begin_layout Section
36367 \begin_inset Index idx
36370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36379 \begin_layout Standard
36384 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
36387 \begin_layout Subsection
36391 \begin_layout Standard
36392 Creates a new document.
36395 \begin_layout Subsection
36399 \begin_layout Standard
36400 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
36401 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
36402 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
36405 \begin_layout Subsection
36409 \begin_layout Standard
36413 \begin_layout Subsection
36417 \begin_layout Standard
36418 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
36419 Click there on a file to open it.
36422 \begin_layout Subsection
36426 \begin_layout Standard
36427 Closes the current document.
36430 \begin_layout Subsection
36434 \begin_layout Standard
36435 Closes all opened documents.
36438 \begin_layout Subsection
36442 \begin_layout Standard
36443 Saves the actual document.
36446 \begin_layout Subsection
36450 \begin_layout Standard
36451 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
36454 \begin_layout Subsection
36458 \begin_layout Standard
36459 Saves all opened documents.
36462 \begin_layout Subsection
36466 \begin_layout Standard
36467 Reloads the actual document from disk.
36470 \begin_layout Subsection
36474 \begin_layout Standard
36475 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
36476 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
36477 It is described in the section
36479 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
36484 Additional Features
36489 \begin_layout Subsection
36493 \begin_layout Standard
36494 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
36495 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
36497 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
36498 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
36502 \begin_layout Standard
36503 When using the menu entry
36506 \begin_inset space ~
36511 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
36515 \begin_inset space ~
36519 \begin_inset space ~
36523 \begin_inset space ~
36528 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
36529 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
36532 \begin_layout Subsection
36534 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36536 name "subsec:Export"
36543 \begin_layout Standard
36544 You can export your document to various file formats.
36545 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
36547 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
36548 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
36549 during its configuration.
36552 \begin_layout Standard
36553 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
36555 \begin_inset space ~
36559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36561 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
36568 \begin_layout Description
36574 \begin_inset space ~
36577 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
36579 \begin_inset space ~
36582 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
36583 \begin_inset Newline newline
36586 Since \SpecialChar LyX
36587 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
36591 \begin_layout Description
36592 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
36598 \begin_layout Description
36600 \begin_inset space ~
36603 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
36609 \begin_layout Description
36610 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
36611 's native DVI-format.
36612 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
36613 files paths or file names in your document.
36615 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
36622 \begin_layout Description
36623 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
36624 in files paths or file names
36627 \begin_layout Description
36629 \begin_inset space ~
36636 ) DVI-format using the program
36638 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
36641 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
36645 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36653 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
36661 \begin_layout Description
36663 \begin_inset space ~
36666 (cropped) the same as
36670 but with cropped page margins.
36673 \begin_layout Description
36675 \begin_inset space ~
36678 Dot text file with code in the programming language
36682 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
36687 \begin_layout Description
36691 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36699 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
36707 \begin_layout Description
36709 \begin_inset space ~
36713 \begin_inset space ~
36716 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
36720 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
36728 \begin_layout Description
36732 \begin_inset space ~
36741 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36742 source that is compilable with the program
36744 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
36748 \begin_layout Description
36752 \begin_inset space ~
36757 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36758 source, additionally all images used in the document
36759 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
36763 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
36766 \begin_layout Description
36770 \begin_inset space ~
36775 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36776 source code, additionally all images used in the document
36777 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
36785 \begin_layout Description
36789 \begin_inset space ~
36798 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36799 source that is compilable with the program
36805 \begin_layout Description
36807 \begin_inset space ~
36811 \begin_inset space ~
36818 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36819 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
36825 \begin_layout Description
36827 \begin_inset space ~
36830 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
36831 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
36833 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36837 \begin_inset space \space{}
36842 \begin_inset space ~
36846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36861 represent the version number)
36864 \begin_layout Description
36866 \begin_inset space ~
36870 \begin_inset space ~
36873 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
36874 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
36875 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36879 \begin_layout Description
36880 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
36881 's internal XHTML engine
36884 \begin_layout Description
36886 \begin_inset space ~
36890 \begin_inset space ~
36894 \begin_inset space ~
36898 \begin_inset space ~
36901 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
36906 For the conversion the program
36915 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
36918 \begin_layout Description
36919 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
36924 \begin_layout Description
36926 \begin_inset space ~
36929 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
36931 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
36934 For the conversion the program
36943 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
36946 \begin_layout Description
36948 \begin_inset space ~
36951 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
36952 For the conversion the program
36961 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
36964 \begin_layout Description
36966 \begin_inset space ~
36969 (cropped) the same as
36972 \begin_inset space ~
36977 but with cropped page margins
36980 \begin_layout Description
36984 \begin_inset space ~
36989 PDF-format using the program
36993 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
36996 \begin_layout Description
37000 \begin_inset space ~
37004 \begin_inset space ~
37012 \begin_inset space ~
37017 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37018 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37022 \begin_inset space \space{}
37025 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37029 \begin_layout Description
37033 \begin_inset space ~
37038 PDF-format using the program
37040 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37043 , produces PDF-files directly
37046 \begin_layout Description
37050 \begin_inset space ~
37055 PDF-format using the program
37059 , produces PDF-files directly
37062 \begin_layout Description
37066 \begin_inset space ~
37071 PDF-format using the program
37075 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37078 \begin_layout Description
37082 \begin_inset space ~
37087 PDF-format using the program
37092 , produces PDF-files directly
37095 \begin_layout Description
37099 \begin_inset space ~
37107 \begin_layout Description
37111 \begin_inset space ~
37115 \begin_inset space ~
37120 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37121 and then exported as text using the program
37126 \begin_layout Description
37131 PostScript format using the program
37139 options see section
37140 \begin_inset space ~
37144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37146 reference "subsec:General-output"
37153 \begin_layout Description
37154 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37155 source and also code in the statistical programming
37169 it is possible to use
37173 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37177 \begin_layout Standard
37178 If one of the menu entries
37185 \begin_inset space ~
37194 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37196 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37198 \begin_inset space ~
37202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37204 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37209 \begin_inset Index idx
37212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37213 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37222 \begin_layout Subsection
37226 \begin_layout Standard
37227 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37228 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37231 \begin_inset space ~
37235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37237 reference "sec:Paths"
37242 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
37251 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
37252 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
37253 's preferences as described in section
37254 \begin_inset space ~
37258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37260 reference "subsec:Converters"
37267 \begin_layout Subsection
37268 New and Close Window
37271 \begin_layout Standard
37272 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
37276 \begin_layout Subsection
37280 \begin_layout Standard
37281 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
37284 \begin_layout Section
37286 \begin_inset Index idx
37289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37298 \begin_layout Subsection
37302 \begin_layout Standard
37303 Described in section
37304 \begin_inset space ~
37308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37310 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
37317 \begin_layout Subsection
37318 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
37321 \begin_layout Standard
37322 Described in section
37323 \begin_inset space ~
37327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37329 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37336 \begin_layout Subsection
37340 \begin_layout Standard
37341 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
37342 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
37345 \begin_layout Subsection
37349 \begin_layout Standard
37350 Selects the whole document.
37353 \begin_layout Subsection
37354 Find & Replace (Quick)
37357 \begin_layout Standard
37358 Described in section
37359 \begin_inset space ~
37363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37365 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37372 \begin_layout Subsection
37373 Find & Replace (Advanced)
37376 \begin_layout Standard
37377 Described in section
37378 \begin_inset space ~
37382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37384 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37391 \begin_layout Subsection
37392 Move Paragraph Up/Down
37395 \begin_layout Standard
37396 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
37400 \begin_layout Subsection
37404 \begin_layout Standard
37405 Described in section
37406 \begin_inset space ~
37410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37412 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
37419 \begin_layout Subsection
37421 \begin_inset Index idx
37424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37425 Paragraph ! Settings
37433 \begin_layout Standard
37434 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
37435 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
37439 \begin_layout Standard
37440 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
37441 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
37447 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37448 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37450 \begin_inset space ~
37458 \begin_layout Subsection
37459 Table and Rows & Columns
37462 \begin_layout Standard
37463 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
37464 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
37465 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
37468 \begin_layout Subsection
37472 \begin_layout Standard
37473 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
37474 It will dissolve this inset.
37475 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
37479 \begin_layout Subsection
37483 \begin_layout Standard
37484 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
37485 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
37488 \begin_layout Subsection
37489 Increase/Decrease List Depth
37492 \begin_layout Standard
37493 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
37495 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
37496 \begin_inset space ~
37500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37502 reference "sec:Nesting"
37507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37509 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
37516 \begin_layout Subsection
37519 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
37522 \begin_layout Standard
37523 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
37524 nts of the same type.
37526 \begin_inset space ~
37530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37532 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
37536 for an explanation.
37539 \begin_layout Section
37541 \begin_inset Index idx
37544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37553 \begin_layout Standard
37554 At the bottom of the
37558 menu the opened documents are listed.
37561 \begin_layout Subsection
37562 Open/Close all Insets
37565 \begin_layout Standard
37566 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
37569 \begin_layout Subsection
37570 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
37573 \begin_layout Standard
37574 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
37577 \begin_layout Standard
37578 Math macros are described in the
37585 \begin_layout Subsection
37589 \begin_layout Standard
37590 Shows the outline window as described in sections
37591 \begin_inset space ~
37595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37597 reference "sec:Navigating"
37602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37604 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
37611 \begin_layout Subsection
37615 \begin_layout Standard
37616 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
37618 \begin_inset space ~
37622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37624 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37631 \begin_layout Subsection
37635 \begin_layout Standard
37636 Opens a window showing console messages.
37637 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
37639 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37642 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
37643 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
37644 is processing the document.
37647 \begin_layout Subsection
37649 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37651 name "subsec:Toolbars"
37656 \begin_inset Index idx
37659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37668 \begin_layout Standard
37669 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
37670 All toolbars and the
37673 \begin_inset space ~
37678 can be turned on and off.
37683 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
37695 \begin_inset space ~
37707 \begin_inset space ~
37712 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
37716 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
37723 \begin_layout Standard
37728 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
37732 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
37733 or when a certain feature is enabled.
37734 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
37735 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
37736 is inside a formula or table respectively.
37739 \begin_layout Standard
37741 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
37742 \begin_inset space ~
37746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37748 reference "sec:Toolbars"
37755 \begin_layout Subsection
37759 \begin_layout Standard
37763 \begin_inset space ~
37767 \begin_inset space ~
37771 \begin_inset space ~
37775 \begin_inset space ~
37779 \begin_inset space ~
37783 \begin_inset space ~
37788 will split \SpecialChar LyX
37789 's main window vertically while
37792 \begin_inset space ~
37796 \begin_inset space ~
37800 \begin_inset space ~
37804 \begin_inset space ~
37808 \begin_inset space ~
37812 \begin_inset space ~
37817 will split it horizontally.
37818 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
37819 to view the same document, but at different positions.
37820 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
37821 three or more documents at the same time.
37822 To close a split view, use the menu
37825 \begin_inset space ~
37829 \begin_inset space ~
37837 \begin_layout Subsection
37841 \begin_layout Standard
37842 Closes a split view.
37845 \begin_layout Subsection
37849 \begin_layout Standard
37850 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
37851 so that you will see nothing but your text.
37852 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
37853 's main window fullscreen.
37854 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
37855 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
37858 \begin_layout Section
37860 \begin_inset Index idx
37863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37872 \begin_layout Subsection
37876 \begin_layout Standard
37877 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
37878 \begin_inset space ~
37882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37884 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
37895 \begin_layout Subsection
37897 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37899 name "subsec:Special-Character"
37906 \begin_layout Standard
37907 Here you can insert the following characters:
37910 \begin_layout Description
37915 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
37918 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
37919 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37920 -packages you have installed.
37921 You can get a complete display by checking
37924 \begin_inset space ~
37930 \begin_inset Newline newline
37934 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37942 Not all characters will be visible in the
37946 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
37947 dialog (see section
37948 \begin_inset space ~
37952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37954 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
37958 ) can display every character.
37966 \begin_layout Description
37967 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
37971 \begin_layout Description
37973 \begin_inset space ~
37977 \begin_inset space ~
37980 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
37981 \begin_inset space ~
37985 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37987 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
37994 \begin_layout Description
37996 \begin_inset space ~
37999 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38002 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38003 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38009 \begin_layout Description
38011 \begin_inset space ~
38014 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38017 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38018 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38024 \begin_layout Description
38026 \begin_inset space ~
38029 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38033 \begin_layout Description
38035 \begin_inset space ~
38038 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38042 \begin_layout Description
38044 \begin_inset space ~
38047 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38053 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38059 \begin_layout Description
38061 \begin_inset space ~
38064 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38068 \begin_layout Description
38070 \begin_inset space ~
38074 \begin_inset Index idx
38077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38084 \begin_inset Index idx
38087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38088 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38093 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38094 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38096 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38102 \begin_inset Index idx
38105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38113 \begin_inset Newline newline
38116 More information about this feature can be found in the
38122 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38128 \begin_layout Description
38129 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38131 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38132 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38136 \begin_layout Subsection
38140 \begin_layout Standard
38141 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38144 \begin_layout Description
38145 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38146 \begin_inset script superscript
38148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38157 \begin_layout Description
38158 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38159 \begin_inset script subscript
38161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38170 \begin_layout Description
38172 \begin_inset space ~
38175 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38176 \begin_inset space ~
38180 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38182 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38189 \begin_layout Description
38191 \begin_inset space ~
38194 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38195 \begin_inset space ~
38199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38201 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38208 \begin_layout Description
38210 \begin_inset space ~
38213 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38214 \begin_inset space ~
38218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38220 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38227 \begin_layout Description
38229 \begin_inset space ~
38232 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38234 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38238 \begin_inset space \space{}
38241 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38242 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
38248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38251 To insert a fraction use the command
38256 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38260 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
38266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38269 The visible space is hereby the character before the
38276 \begin_layout Description
38278 \begin_inset space ~
38281 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
38282 \begin_inset space ~
38286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38288 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
38295 \begin_layout Description
38297 \begin_inset space ~
38300 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
38301 \begin_inset space ~
38305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38307 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
38314 \begin_layout Description
38316 \begin_inset space ~
38319 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
38320 \begin_inset space ~
38324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38326 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
38333 \begin_layout Description
38334 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
38335 \begin_inset space ~
38339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38341 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
38348 \begin_layout Description
38350 \begin_inset space ~
38353 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
38354 \begin_inset space ~
38358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38360 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
38367 \begin_layout Description
38369 \begin_inset space ~
38372 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
38373 \begin_inset space ~
38377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38379 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
38386 \begin_layout Description
38388 \begin_inset space ~
38392 \begin_inset space ~
38395 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
38396 \begin_inset space ~
38400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38402 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38409 \begin_layout Description
38411 \begin_inset space ~
38414 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
38415 as described in section
38416 \begin_inset space ~
38420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38422 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38429 \begin_layout Description
38431 \begin_inset space ~
38434 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
38435 \begin_inset space ~
38439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38441 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38448 \begin_layout Description
38450 \begin_inset space ~
38453 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
38454 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
38456 \begin_inset space ~
38460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38462 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38469 \begin_layout Description
38471 \begin_inset space ~
38474 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
38475 \begin_inset space ~
38479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38481 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
38488 \begin_layout Description
38490 \begin_inset space ~
38494 \begin_inset space ~
38497 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
38498 \begin_inset space ~
38502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38504 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
38511 \begin_layout Subsection
38515 \begin_layout Standard
38516 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
38520 \begin_inset space ~
38541 are described in section
38542 \begin_inset space ~
38546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38548 reference "sec:toc"
38557 is described in section
38558 \begin_inset space ~
38562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38564 reference "sec:Index"
38572 is described in section
38573 \begin_inset space ~
38577 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38579 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
38585 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
38588 is described in section
38589 \begin_inset space ~
38593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38595 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
38602 \begin_layout Subsection
38606 \begin_layout Standard
38607 To insert floats, as described in section
38608 \begin_inset space ~
38612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38614 reference "sec:Floats"
38618 and in detail the chapter
38625 \begin_inset space ~
38633 \begin_layout Subsection
38637 \begin_layout Standard
38638 To insert notes, described in section
38639 \begin_inset space ~
38643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38645 reference "sec:Notes"
38652 \begin_layout Subsection
38656 \begin_layout Standard
38657 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
38659 Branches are described in section
38660 \begin_inset space ~
38664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38666 reference "sec:Branches"
38673 \begin_layout Subsection
38677 \begin_layout Standard
38678 Inserts document class-specific insets.
38679 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
38681 An example is the document class
38682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38689 with three custom insets.
38692 Flex insets and InsetLayout
38696 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
38702 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
38705 \begin_layout Subsection
38707 \begin_inset Index idx
38710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38719 \begin_layout Standard
38720 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
38722 For more information see chapter
38724 External Document Parts
38727 \begin_inset space ~
38733 \begin_layout Subsection
38735 \begin_inset Index idx
38738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38747 \begin_layout Standard
38748 Inserts a box in a certain style.
38749 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
38756 \begin_inset space ~
38764 \begin_layout Subsection
38768 \begin_layout Standard
38773 dialog as described in section
38774 \begin_inset space ~
38778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38780 reference "sec:Bibliography"
38787 \begin_layout Subsection
38791 \begin_layout Standard
38796 as described in section
38797 \begin_inset space ~
38801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38803 reference "sec:Cross-References"
38810 \begin_layout Subsection
38814 \begin_layout Standard
38819 as described in section
38820 \begin_inset space ~
38824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38826 reference "sec:Cross-References"
38833 \begin_layout Subsection
38835 \begin_inset Index idx
38838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38845 \begin_inset Index idx
38848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38849 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
38857 \begin_layout Standard
38858 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
38859 Floats are described in section
38860 \begin_inset space ~
38864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38866 reference "sec:Floats"
38870 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
38872 Multi-page Captions
38877 \begin_inset space ~
38885 \begin_layout Subsection
38889 \begin_layout Standard
38890 Inserts an index entry as described in section
38891 \begin_inset space ~
38895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38897 reference "sec:Index"
38904 \begin_layout Subsection
38908 \begin_layout Standard
38909 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
38910 \begin_inset space ~
38914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38916 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
38923 \begin_layout Subsection
38927 \begin_layout Standard
38928 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
38929 Tables are described in section
38930 \begin_inset space ~
38934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38936 reference "sec:Tables"
38940 and in detail in the chapter
38947 \begin_inset space ~
38955 \begin_layout Subsection
38959 \begin_layout Standard
38965 Graphics are described in section
38966 \begin_inset space ~
38970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38972 reference "sec:Graphics"
38979 \begin_layout Subsection
38983 \begin_layout Standard
38984 Inserts a URL as described in section
38985 \begin_inset space ~
38989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38991 reference "subsec:URLs"
38998 \begin_layout Subsection
39002 \begin_layout Standard
39003 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39004 \begin_inset space ~
39008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39010 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39017 \begin_layout Subsection
39021 \begin_layout Standard
39022 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39023 \begin_inset space ~
39027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39029 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39036 \begin_layout Subsection
39040 \begin_layout Standard
39041 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39042 \begin_inset space ~
39046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39048 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39055 \begin_layout Subsection
39059 \begin_layout Standard
39060 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39061 title or caption of a float.
39062 Inserts a short title as described in section
39063 \begin_inset space ~
39067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39069 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39076 \begin_layout Subsection
39081 \begin_layout Standard
39082 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39083 Code box as described in section
39084 \begin_inset space ~
39088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39090 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39097 \begin_layout Subsection
39099 \begin_inset Index idx
39102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39111 \begin_layout Standard
39112 Inserts a program listings box.
39113 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39115 Program Code Listings
39120 \begin_inset space ~
39128 \begin_layout Subsection
39132 \begin_layout Standard
39133 Inserts the actual date.
39134 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39139 \begin_layout Subsection
39143 \begin_layout Standard
39144 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39145 \begin_inset space ~
39149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39151 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39158 \begin_layout Section
39160 \begin_inset Index idx
39163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39172 \begin_layout Standard
39173 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39174 \begin_inset space ~
39177 of the current document.
39178 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39181 \begin_layout Subsection
39185 \begin_layout Standard
39186 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39187 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39188 to jump, for example, between section
39189 \begin_inset space ~
39193 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39194 \begin_inset space ~
39197 2.5 and use the submenu
39200 \begin_inset space ~
39204 \begin_inset space ~
39211 \begin_inset space ~
39217 \begin_inset space ~
39221 \begin_inset space ~
39227 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
39231 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
39237 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
39240 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
39243 \begin_layout Standard
39244 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
39248 \begin_inset space ~
39253 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
39256 \begin_inset space ~
39261 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
39264 \begin_layout Subsection
39265 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
39268 \begin_layout Standard
39269 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
39273 \begin_layout Subsection
39277 \begin_layout Standard
39278 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
39279 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
39280 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
39284 \begin_inset space ~
39288 \begin_inset space ~
39296 \begin_layout Subsection
39300 \begin_layout Standard
39301 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
39304 The \SpecialChar LyX
39305 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
39307 \begin_inset space ~
39315 \begin_inset space ~
39320 manual for a detailed description.
39323 \begin_layout Section
39325 \begin_inset Index idx
39328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39337 \begin_layout Subsection
39341 \begin_layout Standard
39342 Change Tracking is described in section
39343 \begin_inset space ~
39347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39349 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39356 \begin_layout Subsection
39364 \begin_layout Standard
39365 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
39366 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
39367 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39369 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
39370 to the clipboard or update the view.
39371 \begin_inset Newline newline
39374 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39378 \begin_layout Standard
39381 Open Containing Directory
39383 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
39384 's temporary folder for the document.
39385 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
39386 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
39387 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
39388 For example some journals require to send the
39392 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39396 \begin_layout Subsection
39397 Start Appendix Here
39400 \begin_layout Standard
39401 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
39402 as described in section
39403 \begin_inset space ~
39407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39409 reference "sec:Appendices"
39416 \begin_layout Subsection
39418 \begin_inset space ~
39424 \begin_layout Standard
39425 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
39426 default output format for the document (menu
39428 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39429 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39430 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39432 \begin_inset space ~
39436 \begin_inset space ~
39442 \begin_inset space ~
39446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39448 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
39452 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
39455 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39456 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39458 \begin_inset space ~
39461 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39463 \begin_inset space ~
39466 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39468 \begin_inset space ~
39472 \begin_inset space ~
39478 \begin_inset space ~
39482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39484 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39488 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
39489 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
39491 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39492 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39494 \begin_inset space ~
39497 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39499 \begin_inset space ~
39502 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39506 \begin_inset space ~
39510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39512 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39517 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
39518 when it is first configured.
39519 The default output format is
39522 \begin_inset space ~
39530 \begin_layout Subsection
39531 View (Other Formats)
39534 \begin_layout Standard
39535 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
39536 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
39537 actual document with an external program.
39538 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
39539 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39540 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
39542 All possible formats are listed in section
39543 \begin_inset space ~
39547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39549 reference "subsec:Export"
39554 You should at least see the menu entry
39559 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39561 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39563 \begin_inset space ~
39567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39569 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39574 \begin_inset Index idx
39577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39578 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39587 \begin_layout Standard
39588 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
39589 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
39591 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39592 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39594 \begin_inset space ~
39597 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39599 \begin_inset space ~
39602 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39606 \begin_inset space ~
39610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39612 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39617 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
39618 when it is first configured.
39621 \begin_layout Subsection
39623 \begin_inset space ~
39629 \begin_layout Standard
39630 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
39631 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
39634 \begin_layout Subsection
39635 Update (Other Formats)
39638 \begin_layout Standard
39639 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
39640 your document without opening a new viewer window.
39643 \begin_layout Subsection
39644 View Master Document
39647 \begin_layout Standard
39648 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
39650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39664 \begin_inset space ~
39669 manual for more information on this topic).
39670 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
39671 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
39675 \begin_inset space ~
39679 \begin_inset space ~
39684 generates the output of the whole book, while
39688 will just output the chapter alone.
39691 \begin_layout Standard
39692 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
39693 in the document settings (menu
39695 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39696 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39697 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39699 \begin_inset space ~
39703 \begin_inset space ~
39709 \begin_inset space ~
39713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39715 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
39719 ) or in the preferences (menu
39721 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39722 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39724 \begin_inset space ~
39727 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39729 \begin_inset space ~
39732 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39734 \begin_inset space ~
39738 \begin_inset space ~
39744 \begin_inset space ~
39748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39750 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39757 \begin_layout Subsection
39758 Update Master Document
39761 \begin_layout Standard
39762 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
39764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39778 \begin_inset space ~
39783 manual for more information on this topic).
39784 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
39785 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
39788 \begin_layout Standard
39789 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
39790 in the document settings (menu
39792 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39793 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39794 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39796 \begin_inset space ~
39800 \begin_inset space ~
39806 \begin_inset space ~
39810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39812 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
39816 ) or in the preferences (menu
39818 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39819 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39821 \begin_inset space ~
39824 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39826 \begin_inset space ~
39829 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39831 \begin_inset space ~
39835 \begin_inset space ~
39841 \begin_inset space ~
39845 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39847 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39854 \begin_layout Subsection
39856 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39858 name "subsec:Compressed"
39865 \begin_layout Standard
39866 Un/compresses the current document.
39867 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
39868 compression (see the
39870 Additional Features
39872 manual for details).
39875 \begin_layout Subsection
39879 \begin_layout Standard
39880 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
39883 \begin_layout Subsection
39887 \begin_layout Standard
39888 The document settings are described in appendix
39889 \begin_inset space ~
39893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39895 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
39902 \begin_layout Section
39904 \begin_inset Index idx
39907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39916 \begin_layout Subsection
39920 \begin_layout Standard
39921 Spell checking is explained in section
39922 \begin_inset space ~
39926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39928 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
39935 \begin_layout Subsection
39939 \begin_layout Standard
39940 The thesaurus is described in section
39941 \begin_inset space ~
39945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39947 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
39954 \begin_layout Subsection
39956 \begin_inset Index idx
39959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39966 \begin_inset Index idx
39969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39978 \begin_layout Standard
39979 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
39980 the highlighted document part.
39983 \begin_layout Subsection
39989 \begin_inset Index idx
39992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39993 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40002 \begin_layout Standard
40003 Generates with the help of the program
40005 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40008 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40009 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40010 This feature is not available on Windows.
40013 \begin_layout Subsection
40019 \begin_inset Index idx
40022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40032 \begin_layout Standard
40033 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40038 \begin_inset space ~
40043 to see the full filename paths.
40046 \begin_layout Subsection
40048 \begin_inset Index idx
40051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40060 \begin_layout Standard
40061 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40062 files as described in section
40063 \begin_inset space ~
40067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40069 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40076 \begin_layout Subsection
40078 \begin_inset Index idx
40081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40094 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40112 \begin_inset Index idx
40115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40116 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40125 \begin_layout Standard
40126 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40127 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40128 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40129 -packages and programs it needs; see
40131 \begin_inset space ~
40135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40137 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40144 \begin_layout Subsection
40148 \begin_layout Standard
40153 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40154 \begin_inset space ~
40158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40160 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40167 \begin_layout Section
40169 \begin_inset Index idx
40172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40181 \begin_layout Standard
40182 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40183 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40185 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40189 \begin_layout Standard
40193 \begin_inset space ~
40198 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40199 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40200 packages and classes found
40201 by \SpecialChar LyX
40203 \begin_inset space ~
40207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40209 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40216 \begin_layout Standard
40220 \begin_inset space ~
40225 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
40230 \begin_layout Section
40232 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40234 name "sec:Toolbars"
40241 \begin_layout Standard
40242 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
40243 \begin_inset space ~
40247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40249 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
40256 \begin_layout Standard
40257 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
40258 This is described in the
40260 Additional Features
40265 \begin_layout Subsection
40267 \begin_inset Index idx
40270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40279 \begin_layout Standard
40280 \begin_inset Graphics
40281 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
40289 \begin_layout Standard
40290 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40296 \begin_layout Standard
40297 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40314 \begin_inset Note Note
40317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40318 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
40323 manual for more information.
40331 \begin_layout Standard
40332 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40338 \begin_layout Standard
40339 \begin_inset Tabular
40340 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
40341 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40342 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40343 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40349 \begin_inset Graphics
40350 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
40360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40364 pull-down box for the environments
40377 \begin_layout Standard
40378 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
40384 \begin_layout Standard
40386 \begin_inset Tabular
40387 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
40388 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40389 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40390 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40391 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40414 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40421 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40444 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40451 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40474 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40481 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40490 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
40498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40504 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40511 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40520 arg "spelling-continuously"
40528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40532 Spellcheck continuously
40538 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40561 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40568 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40591 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40598 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40621 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40628 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40651 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40658 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40681 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40688 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40697 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
40705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40711 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40713 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40717 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40721 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40730 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40737 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
40745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40751 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40753 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40757 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40761 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40770 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40779 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
40787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40793 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
40794 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
40801 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40822 Emphasize text, function of the
40824 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40826 \begin_inset space ~
40829 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
40838 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40859 Set text to noun style, function of the
40861 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40863 \begin_inset space ~
40866 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
40875 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40884 arg "textstyle-apply"
40892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40896 Format text using the current settings in the
40898 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40900 \begin_inset space ~
40903 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
40912 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40935 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40936 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
40938 \begin_inset space ~
40947 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40956 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
40964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40970 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40977 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40984 arg "tabular-insert"
40992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40998 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41005 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41014 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41026 Toggle outline window on/off,
41028 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41035 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41044 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41056 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41062 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41071 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41083 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41096 \begin_layout Subsection
41098 \begin_inset Index idx
41101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41110 \begin_layout Standard
41111 \begin_inset Graphics
41112 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41120 \begin_layout Standard
41121 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41127 \begin_layout Standard
41128 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41132 \begin_layout Standard
41133 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41139 \begin_layout Standard
41140 \begin_inset Tabular
41141 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41142 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41143 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41144 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41145 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41172 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41181 arg "layout Enumerate"
41189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41199 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41208 arg "layout Itemize"
41216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41226 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41253 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41262 arg "layout Description"
41270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41280 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41289 arg "depth-increment"
41297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41303 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41305 \begin_inset space ~
41309 \begin_inset space ~
41318 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41327 arg "depth-decrement"
41335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41341 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41343 \begin_inset space ~
41347 \begin_inset space ~
41356 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41365 arg "float-insert figure"
41373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41379 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41380 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41387 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41396 arg "float-insert table"
41404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41410 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41411 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41418 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41441 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41448 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41457 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
41465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41471 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41478 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41487 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
41495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41501 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41508 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41531 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41533 \begin_inset space ~
41542 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41551 arg "nomencl-insert"
41559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41565 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41567 \begin_inset space ~
41576 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41585 arg "footnote-insert"
41593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41599 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41606 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41615 arg "marginalnote-insert"
41623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41629 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41631 \begin_inset space ~
41640 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41663 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41664 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
41666 \begin_inset space ~
41675 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41684 arg "box-insert Frameless"
41692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41698 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41705 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41728 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41735 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41758 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41760 \begin_inset space ~
41769 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41778 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
41786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41792 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41793 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41800 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41809 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
41817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41823 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41824 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41826 \begin_inset space ~
41835 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41844 arg "dialog-show character"
41852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41858 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41860 \begin_inset space ~
41863 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41870 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41879 arg "layout-paragraph"
41887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41893 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41895 \begin_inset space ~
41904 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41913 arg "thesaurus-entry"
41921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41927 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41941 \begin_layout Subsection
41942 View/Update Toolbar
41943 \begin_inset Index idx
41946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41947 Toolbar ! View / Update
41955 \begin_layout Standard
41956 \begin_inset Graphics
41957 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
41964 \begin_layout Standard
41965 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41971 \begin_layout Standard
41972 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41976 \begin_layout Standard
41977 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41983 \begin_layout Standard
41984 \begin_inset Tabular
41985 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
41986 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41987 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41988 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41989 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42012 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42019 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42028 arg "buffer-update"
42036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42042 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42049 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42058 arg "master-buffer-view"
42066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42072 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42074 \begin_inset space ~
42083 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42092 arg "master-buffer-update"
42100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42106 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42108 \begin_inset space ~
42112 \begin_inset space ~
42121 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42130 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42144 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42145 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42146 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42147 Synchronize with Output
42153 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42176 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42177 View (Other Formats)
42183 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42190 arg "update-others"
42198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42204 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42205 Update (Other Formats)
42218 \begin_layout Standard
42219 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
42223 \begin_layout Subsection
42227 \begin_layout Standard
42228 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
42229 \begin_inset space ~
42233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42235 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42239 , the table toolbar
42240 \begin_inset Index idx
42243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42252 \begin_inset space ~
42257 manual and the math macro toolbar
42258 \begin_inset Index idx
42261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42274 \begin_layout Chapter
42275 The Document Settings
42276 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42278 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42283 \begin_inset Index idx
42286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42287 Document ! Settings
42295 \begin_layout Standard
42299 \begin_inset space ~
42304 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
42305 is called with the menu
42307 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42311 You can save your document settings as default with the
42313 Save as Document Defaults
42315 button in any dialog.
42316 This will create a template named
42320 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
42321 when you create a new document without
42325 \begin_layout Standard
42330 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
42331 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
42334 \begin_layout Standard
42335 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
42336 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
42337 to find the one you are looking for.
42338 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
42339 the submenus of the dialog.
42341 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42345 \begin_inset space \space{}
42349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42356 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
42357 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
42358 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
42361 \begin_layout Section
42365 \begin_layout Standard
42366 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
42368 Document classes are described in section
42369 \begin_inset space ~
42373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42375 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
42383 \begin_layout Standard
42387 \begin_inset space ~
42392 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
42397 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
42398 as a layout for a document class.
42399 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
42401 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
42410 \begin_layout Standard
42411 Some classes use special class options by default.
42412 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
42416 and you can decide to use them or not.
42417 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
42418 recommended you leave them untouched.
42423 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42424 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
42429 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42431 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
42436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42437 When you want to use one of the following drivers
42438 \begin_inset Newline newline
42443 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
42446 \begin_inset Newline newline
42449 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42450 distribution, see section
42455 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42457 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
42470 \begin_layout Standard
42475 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
42476 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
42477 in the background if the child document
42478 is opened without its master.
42479 This way child documents are always compilable.
42480 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
42487 \begin_inset space ~
42495 \begin_layout Standard
42496 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42507 \begin_inset Index idx
42510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42512 packages ! prettyref
42518 \begin_inset Index idx
42521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42523 packages ! refstyle
42528 for cross-references, see section
42529 \begin_inset space ~
42533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42535 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42542 \begin_layout Section
42546 \begin_layout Standard
42547 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
42548 Please refer to the section
42551 \begin_inset space ~
42559 \begin_inset space ~
42564 manual for details.
42567 \begin_layout Section
42571 \begin_layout Standard
42572 Modules are explained in section
42573 \begin_inset space ~
42577 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42579 reference "subsec:Modules"
42586 \begin_layout Section
42590 \begin_layout Standard
42592 \begin_inset space ~
42596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42598 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
42605 \begin_layout Section
42609 \begin_layout Standard
42610 The document font settings are described in section
42611 \begin_inset space ~
42615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42617 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
42624 \begin_layout Section
42628 \begin_layout Standard
42629 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
42641 \begin_inset space ~
42646 and whether it should be a
42649 \begin_inset space ~
42654 can also be specified here.
42657 \begin_layout Standard
42658 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
42659 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
42660 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
42662 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
42665 \begin_layout Standard
42668 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
42671 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
42672 justifies the text on screen.
42673 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
42677 \begin_layout Section
42681 \begin_layout Standard
42682 This dialog is described in sections
42683 \begin_inset space ~
42687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42689 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
42694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42696 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
42703 \begin_layout Section
42707 \begin_layout Standard
42708 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
42709 \begin_inset space ~
42713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42715 reference "subsec:Margins"
42722 \begin_layout Section
42724 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42726 name "sec:Language-encodings"
42731 \begin_inset Index idx
42734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42735 Language ! Encoding
42743 \begin_layout Standard
42744 The document language and quote styles are set here.
42745 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
42746 (the \SpecialChar LyX
42748 is always encoded in utf8).
42749 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
42750 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
42751 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
42752 -command is not known for
42753 a particular character).
42756 \begin_layout Standard
42757 If you use the option
42762 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
42763 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
42764 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42766 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
42767 exactly one encoding.
42768 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
42771 \begin_layout Standard
42773 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
42774 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
42775 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42776 installation supports Unicode), choose
42777 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
42778 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
42779 is quite incomplete, so
42780 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
42785 (when \SpecialChar LyX
42786 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
42787 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
42788 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
42789 -commands is not used, because all
42790 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
42791 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
42792 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
42793 , two new alternative engines
42794 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
42796 Both engines support Unicode natively.
42798 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
42801 \begin_inset space ~
42809 \begin_inset space ~
42817 \begin_inset space ~
42823 \begin_inset space ~
42827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42829 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
42834 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
42838 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
42841 \begin_layout Standard
42845 \begin_inset space ~
42850 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42851 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
42853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42861 The possible settings are:
42864 \begin_layout Description
42865 Default uses the language package that is selected in
42867 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42868 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42872 \begin_inset space ~
42876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42878 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
42885 \begin_layout Description
42886 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
42887 format you will use.
42888 In many cases this will be
42893 \begin_inset Index idx
42896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42904 If the newer package
42909 \begin_inset Index idx
42912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42914 packages ! polyglossia
42919 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
42920 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
42921 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
42923 this package will be used instead of
42930 \begin_layout Description
42932 \begin_inset space ~
42943 would be more appropriate.
42946 \begin_layout Description
42947 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
42948 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
42952 (for German texts), type in
42955 \begin_inset Newline newline
42960 usepackage{ngerman}
42963 \begin_layout Description
42964 None will not use a language package.
42965 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
42968 \begin_layout Standard
42969 Here is a list with the important encodings:
42972 \begin_layout Description
42974 \begin_inset space ~
42978 \begin_inset space ~
42982 \begin_inset space ~
42989 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42995 \begin_inset Index idx
42998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43000 packages ! inputenc
43006 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43007 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43008 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43012 \begin_layout Description
43013 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43015 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43016 commands, which may result in a big
43017 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43018 -commands are needed.
43021 \begin_layout Description
43023 \begin_inset space ~
43027 \begin_inset space ~
43030 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43033 \begin_layout Description
43035 \begin_inset space ~
43039 \begin_inset space ~
43042 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43045 \begin_layout Description
43047 \begin_inset space ~
43050 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43053 \begin_layout Description
43055 \begin_inset space ~
43059 \begin_inset space ~
43062 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43063 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43066 \begin_layout Description
43068 \begin_inset space ~
43072 \begin_inset space ~
43075 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43079 \begin_layout Description
43081 \begin_inset space ~
43085 \begin_inset space ~
43088 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43089 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43092 \begin_layout Description
43094 \begin_inset space ~
43098 \begin_inset space ~
43102 \begin_inset space ~
43105 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43106 \begin_inset space ~
43112 \begin_layout Description
43114 \begin_inset space ~
43118 \begin_inset space ~
43122 \begin_inset space ~
43125 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43126 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43129 \begin_layout Description
43131 \begin_inset space ~
43135 \begin_inset space ~
43138 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43139 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43140 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43141 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43142 \begin_inset space ~
43146 \begin_inset space ~
43152 \begin_layout Description
43154 \begin_inset space ~
43158 \begin_inset space ~
43161 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43162 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43163 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43165 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43166 \begin_inset space ~
43170 \begin_inset space ~
43176 \begin_layout Description
43178 \begin_inset space ~
43182 \begin_inset space ~
43185 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43188 \begin_layout Description
43190 \begin_inset space ~
43194 \begin_inset space ~
43197 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43200 \begin_layout Description
43202 \begin_inset space ~
43206 \begin_inset space ~
43209 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43212 \begin_layout Description
43214 \begin_inset space ~
43217 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43220 \begin_layout Description
43222 \begin_inset space ~
43225 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
43228 \begin_layout Description
43230 \begin_inset space ~
43234 \begin_inset space ~
43237 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
43240 \begin_layout Description
43242 \begin_inset space ~
43246 \begin_inset space ~
43252 \begin_layout Description
43254 \begin_inset space ~
43258 \begin_inset space ~
43261 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
43264 \begin_layout Description
43266 \begin_inset space ~
43270 \begin_inset space ~
43276 \begin_layout Description
43278 \begin_inset space ~
43282 \begin_inset space ~
43285 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43291 \begin_inset Index idx
43294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43301 , when using this, set the document language to
43306 \begin_layout Description
43308 \begin_inset space ~
43312 \begin_inset space ~
43315 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43320 , when using this, set the document language to
43323 \begin_inset space ~
43329 \begin_layout Description
43331 \begin_inset space ~
43335 \begin_inset space ~
43338 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43344 \begin_inset Index idx
43347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43349 packages ! japanese
43354 , when using this, set the document language to
43359 \begin_layout Description
43361 \begin_inset space ~
43365 \begin_inset space ~
43368 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43373 , when using this, set the document language to
43378 \begin_layout Description
43380 \begin_inset space ~
43384 \begin_inset space ~
43387 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43392 , when using this, set the document language to
43397 \begin_layout Description
43399 \begin_inset space ~
43402 (EUC-KR) for Korean
43405 \begin_layout Description
43407 \begin_inset space ~
43411 \begin_inset space ~
43415 \begin_inset space ~
43418 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
43421 \begin_layout Description
43423 \begin_inset space ~
43427 \begin_inset space ~
43431 \begin_inset space ~
43434 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
43435 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
43436 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
43439 \begin_layout Description
43441 \begin_inset space ~
43445 \begin_inset space ~
43451 \begin_layout Description
43453 \begin_inset space ~
43457 \begin_inset space ~
43460 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
43461 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
43464 \begin_layout Description
43466 \begin_inset space ~
43470 \begin_inset space ~
43473 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43479 \begin_inset Index idx
43482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43489 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
43492 \begin_layout Description
43494 \begin_inset space ~
43502 \begin_inset space ~
43505 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
43512 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43515 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43522 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43523 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43525 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
43528 \begin_layout Description
43530 \begin_inset space ~
43534 \begin_inset space ~
43537 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43543 \begin_inset Index idx
43546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43553 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
43556 \begin_layout Description
43558 \begin_inset space ~
43561 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43567 \begin_inset Index idx
43570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43572 packages ! inputenc
43578 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
43582 \begin_layout Description
43584 \begin_inset space ~
43588 \begin_inset space ~
43592 \begin_inset space ~
43595 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
43596 \begin_inset space ~
43602 \begin_layout Description
43604 \begin_inset space ~
43608 \begin_inset space ~
43612 \begin_inset space ~
43615 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
43616 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
43617 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
43621 \begin_layout Description
43623 \begin_inset space ~
43627 \begin_inset space ~
43631 \begin_inset space ~
43634 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
43635 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
43638 \begin_layout Section
43640 \begin_inset Index idx
43643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43650 \begin_inset Index idx
43653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43660 \begin_inset Index idx
43663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43664 Color ! Shaded boxes
43670 \begin_inset Index idx
43673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43674 Color ! Greyed-out notes
43682 \begin_layout Standard
43683 Here you can alter the font color for the
43687 (default: black), for
43690 \begin_inset space ~
43695 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
43699 (default: white) and for
43702 \begin_inset space ~
43712 sets the color back to the default.
43715 \begin_layout Standard
43716 Clicking any button showing
43724 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
43725 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
43726 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
43727 later more quickly.
43730 \begin_layout Standard
43731 Note, if you change the
43734 \begin_inset space ~
43739 font color and use the option
43742 \begin_inset space ~
43747 in the document settings under
43750 \begin_inset space ~
43755 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
43756 \begin_inset space ~
43760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43762 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
43769 \begin_layout Standard
43770 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
43776 \begin_layout Standard
43780 \begin_inset space ~
43789 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
43792 \begin_inset space ~
43795 Code after a forced page break:
43798 \begin_layout Itemize
43799 For the page color:
43800 \begin_inset Newline newline
43807 pagecolor{color name}
43810 \begin_layout Itemize
43811 For the text color:
43812 \begin_inset Newline newline
43822 \begin_layout Standard
43823 You are restricted to one of
43859 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
43866 \begin_inset space ~
43872 \begin_inset Newline newline
43875 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
43876 names to refer to them:
43879 \begin_layout Itemize
43885 \begin_inset Newline newline
43890 page_backgroundcolor
43893 \begin_layout Itemize
43897 \begin_inset space ~
43903 \begin_inset Newline newline
43911 \begin_layout Itemize
43915 \begin_inset space ~
43921 \begin_inset Newline newline
43929 \begin_layout Itemize
43933 \begin_inset space ~
43939 \begin_inset Newline newline
43947 \begin_layout Standard
43948 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
43951 \begin_inset space ~
43959 \begin_inset space ~
43967 \begin_layout Section
43971 \begin_layout Standard
43972 Here you can adjust the
43976 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
43980 as described in section
43981 \begin_inset space ~
43985 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43987 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
43994 \begin_layout Section
43998 \begin_layout Standard
43999 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44005 \begin_inset Index idx
44008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44010 packages ! biblatex
44020 \begin_inset Index idx
44023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44035 \begin_inset Index idx
44038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44046 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44049 Sectioned bibliography
44051 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44057 \begin_inset Index idx
44060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44062 packages ! bibtopic
44072 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
44073 Finally, you can select a document-specific
44077 for the generation of the bibliography.
44078 For a further description of these possibilities see section
44079 \begin_inset space ~
44083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44085 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44092 \begin_layout Section
44096 \begin_layout Standard
44097 Here you can define the
44101 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44103 \begin_inset space ~
44107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44109 reference "sec:Index"
44116 \begin_layout Section
44120 \begin_layout Standard
44121 The PDF properties are explained in section
44122 \begin_inset space ~
44126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44128 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44135 \begin_layout Section
44139 \begin_layout Standard
44140 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44141 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44147 \begin_inset Index idx
44150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44162 \begin_inset Index idx
44165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44177 \begin_inset Index idx
44180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44192 \begin_inset Index idx
44195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44207 \begin_inset Index idx
44210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44212 packages ! mathdots
44222 \begin_inset Index idx
44225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44227 packages ! mathtools
44237 \begin_inset Index idx
44240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44252 \begin_inset Index idx
44255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44257 packages ! stackrel
44267 \begin_inset Index idx
44270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44272 packages ! stmaryrd
44282 \begin_inset Index idx
44285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44287 packages ! undertilde
44292 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
44295 \begin_layout Description
44296 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44297 -errors in formulas,
44298 ensure that you have this enabled.
44301 \begin_layout Description
44302 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
44303 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44304 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
44308 \begin_layout Description
44309 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
44312 \begin_inset space ~
44324 \begin_layout Description
44325 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
44328 \begin_inset space ~
44340 \begin_layout Description
44341 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
44352 \begin_layout Description
44353 mathtools is used for the math commands
44389 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
44396 \begin_layout Description
44397 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
44399 Chemical Symbols and Equations
44408 \begin_layout Description
44409 stackrel is used for the math command
44426 \begin_layout Description
44427 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
44430 \begin_layout Description
44431 undertilde is used for the math command
44439 Accents for one Character
44448 \begin_layout Section
44452 \begin_layout Standard
44453 The float placement options are described in the section
44456 \begin_inset space ~
44464 \begin_inset space ~
44472 \begin_layout Section
44476 \begin_layout Standard
44477 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
44479 Program Code Listings
44484 \begin_inset space ~
44492 \begin_layout Section
44496 \begin_layout Standard
44497 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
44505 set to be used and set the
44510 The itemize environment is described in section
44511 \begin_inset space ~
44515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44517 reference "sec:Itemize"
44524 \begin_layout Standard
44525 You can furthermore specify a
44528 \begin_inset space ~
44533 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44534 command of the desired character.
44535 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
44542 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
44544 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44548 \begin_inset space \space{}
44552 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
44562 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
44563 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
44566 \begin_layout Standard
44567 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44575 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44576 -packages in the preamble (menu
44579 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44580 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44583 \begin_inset space ~
44589 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
44593 usepackage{textcomp}
44596 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
44600 usepackage{amssymb}
44610 \begin_layout Section
44614 \begin_layout Standard
44615 Branches are described in section
44616 \begin_inset space ~
44620 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44622 reference "sec:Branches"
44629 \begin_layout Section
44631 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44633 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
44640 \begin_layout Standard
44641 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
44644 \begin_layout Description
44646 \begin_inset space ~
44650 \begin_inset space ~
44653 Format: The format that is used when you enter
44654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44673 View Master Document
44674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44681 Update Master Document
44682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44689 menu or the toolbar.
44690 The default is set in
44692 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44693 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44695 \begin_inset space ~
44698 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44702 \begin_inset space ~
44706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44708 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44715 \begin_layout Description
44717 \begin_inset space ~
44721 \begin_inset space ~
44724 Output settings for the menu
44726 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44728 \begin_inset space ~
44734 For a detailed description see section
44736 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44741 \begin_inset space ~
44749 \begin_layout Description
44751 \begin_inset space ~
44755 \begin_inset space ~
44758 Options offers settings for the export format
44766 \begin_inset space ~
44771 will assure that the output follows exactly version
44772 \begin_inset space ~
44775 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
44779 \begin_inset space ~
44784 settings are described in detail in section
44786 Math Output in XHTML
44791 \begin_inset space ~
44800 \begin_inset space ~
44804 \begin_inset space ~
44809 is used for the size of equations in the output.
44812 \begin_layout Description
44814 \begin_inset space ~
44819 Save transient properties
44821 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
44822 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
44823 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
44827 \begin_layout Itemize
44828 the activation of change tracking
44831 \begin_layout Itemize
44832 the output of tracked changes
44835 \begin_layout Itemize
44836 the recording of the document directory path.
44839 \begin_layout Standard
44840 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
44841 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
44845 \begin_layout Section
44853 \begin_layout Standard
44854 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44856 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
44858 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44860 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
44864 \begin_layout Standard
44865 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44866 -syntax is given in section
44867 \begin_inset space ~
44871 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44873 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
44880 \begin_layout Chapter
44886 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44888 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
44893 \begin_inset Index idx
44896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44905 \begin_layout Standard
44906 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
44908 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44912 It has the following submenus.
44915 \begin_layout Section
44919 \begin_layout Subsection
44923 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44924 User Interface File
44925 \begin_inset Index idx
44928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44929 Customization ! of toolbars
44935 \begin_inset Index idx
44938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44939 Customization ! of menus
44947 \begin_layout Standard
44948 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
44949 interface (ui) file.
44950 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
44958 \begin_layout Description
44963 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
44966 \begin_layout Description
44973 the menu entries in popup context menus
44976 \begin_layout Description
44981 specifies the toolbar buttons
44984 \begin_layout Standard
44985 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
44986 and edit the entries.
44989 \begin_layout Standard
44990 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45002 entries must be finished with an explicit
45027 and in the case of the
45028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45040 The syntax for the entries is:
45043 \begin_layout Standard
45044 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45073 \begin_layout Standard
45075 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45078 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45079 -functions are listed in the menu
45081 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45083 \begin_inset space ~
45091 \begin_layout Standard
45092 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45098 \begin_layout Standard
45099 For example, assuming you use the menu
45101 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45104 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45108 \begin_layout Standard
45109 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45133 \begin_layout Standard
45135 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45150 to have the sixth bookmark.
45153 \begin_layout Standard
45157 \begin_inset space ~
45162 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45163 's toolbar buttons.
45164 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45165 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45168 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45176 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45180 \begin_layout Standard
45183 Enable tool tips in main work area
45185 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45189 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45193 \begin_layout Standard
45198 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45199 should display in the menu
45201 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45203 \begin_inset space ~
45211 \begin_layout Subsection
45215 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45219 \begin_layout Standard
45222 Restore window layouts and geometries
45225 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
45226 the last \SpecialChar LyX
45230 \begin_layout Standard
45233 Restore cursor positions
45235 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
45239 \begin_layout Standard
45242 Load opened files from last session
45244 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
45248 \begin_layout Standard
45251 Clear all session information
45253 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
45254 sessions (cursor positions, names
45255 of last opened documents, etc.).
45258 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45260 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45262 name "subsec:Backup documents"
45267 \begin_inset Index idx
45270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45279 \begin_layout Standard
45282 Backup original documents when saving
45284 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
45285 it was saved the last time.
45286 It is stored in the
45289 \begin_inset space ~
45295 \begin_inset space ~
45299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45301 reference "sec:Paths"
45305 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
45308 \begin_inset space ~
45314 The backup file has the file extension
45315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45329 \begin_layout Standard
45332 Backup documents, every
45334 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
45337 \begin_layout Standard
45340 Save documents compressed by default
45342 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
45343 \begin_inset space ~
45347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45349 reference "subsec:Compressed"
45354 This applies to newly created documents only.
45355 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
45358 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45359 Windows & work area
45362 \begin_layout Standard
45365 Open documents in tabs
45367 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
45371 \begin_layout Standard
45376 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
45381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45383 \begin_inset space ~
45387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45389 reference "sec:Paths"
45393 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
45400 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
45401 documents will be opened in the same running instance
45402 of \SpecialChar LyX
45404 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
45405 instance is created for each file.
45408 \begin_layout Standard
45411 Single close-tab button
45413 is checked, there will only be one close button (
45423 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
45424 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
45425 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
45429 \begin_layout Standard
45430 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45438 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
45439 before the change takes effect.
45447 \begin_layout Standard
45452 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
45454 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
45456 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
45460 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
45461 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
45462 and only want to close the view in once instance.
45465 \begin_layout Subsection
45467 \begin_inset Index idx
45470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45479 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
45486 \begin_layout Standard
45487 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
45491 \begin_layout Standard
45492 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45500 This section only deals with the fonts
45504 the \SpecialChar LyX
45506 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
45509 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45510 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45521 \begin_layout Standard
45522 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
45539 (depends on the system) as its
45542 \begin_inset space ~
45558 \begin_layout Standard
45559 You can change the font size with the
45566 \begin_layout Standard
45571 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
45573 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45576 points have the size of 1
45577 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45581 \begin_inset space ~
45585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45587 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
45592 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
45593 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45597 The sizes are explained in detail in section
45598 \begin_inset space ~
45602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45604 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
45611 \begin_layout Standard
45614 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
45616 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
45617 needs to redraw the screen less often.
45618 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
45619 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
45620 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
45622 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
45623 \begin_inset space ~
45629 \begin_layout Subsection
45631 \begin_inset Index idx
45634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45635 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
45642 \begin_inset Index idx
45645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45654 \begin_layout Standard
45655 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
45656 by choosing an item in the
45657 list and selecting the
45664 \begin_layout Standard
45665 By checking the option
45669 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
45672 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
45673 \begin_inset space ~
45677 \begin_inset space ~
45682 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
45685 \begin_layout Subsection
45687 \begin_inset Index idx
45690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45699 \begin_layout Standard
45700 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
45704 \begin_layout Standard
45709 enables previewing snippets of your document.
45710 This feature is described in section
45711 \begin_inset space ~
45715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45717 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
45724 \begin_layout Standard
45725 Checking the option
45728 \begin_inset space ~
45732 \begin_inset space ~
45736 \begin_inset space ~
45741 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
45744 \begin_layout Section
45746 \begin_inset Index idx
45749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45758 \begin_layout Subsection
45762 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45766 \begin_layout Standard
45769 Cursor follows scrollbar
45771 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
45775 \begin_layout Standard
45776 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
45777 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
45778 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
45781 \begin_layout Standard
45784 Scroll below end of document
45786 is self-explanatory.
45789 \begin_layout Standard
45790 In \SpecialChar LyX
45791 one can jump from word to word by pressing
45798 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
45800 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
45801 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
45804 \begin_layout Standard
45807 Sort environments alphabetically
45809 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
45812 \begin_layout Standard
45815 Group environments by their category
45817 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
45820 \begin_layout Standard
45825 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
45836 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45840 \begin_layout Standard
45841 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
45846 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
45847 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
45851 \begin_layout Subsection
45853 \begin_inset Index idx
45856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45863 \begin_inset Index idx
45866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45867 Settings ! Shortcuts
45875 \begin_layout Standard
45880 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
45882 Several binding files are available, among them:
45885 \begin_layout Description
45886 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
45889 \begin_layout Description
45890 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
45902 \begin_layout Description
45903 mac.bind a set of bindings for
45906 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45914 \begin_layout Standard
45915 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
45920 , and binding files for special languages.
45921 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
45922 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45926 \begin_inset space \space{}
45930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45938 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
45939 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
45940 will try to use the appropriate binding
45944 \begin_layout Standard
45945 Some binding files, like
45949 , only have a limited scope.
45950 When looking at the end of the file
45954 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
45957 \begin_layout Standard
45961 \begin_inset space ~
45965 \begin_inset space ~
45970 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
45971 in the selected key binding file.
45974 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45976 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45978 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
45983 \begin_inset Index idx
45986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45987 Key Bindings ! Editing
45995 \begin_layout Standard
45996 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
45997 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
45998 functions and the bound shortcuts.
45999 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46002 Show key-bindings containing
46005 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46006 Insert there for example as keyword
46007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46014 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46015 functions that contain
46016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46024 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46025 All \SpecialChar LyX
46026 functions are also listed in the file
46031 that you will find in the
46038 \begin_layout Standard
46039 For example, to add the shortcut
46047 , select the function and press the
46052 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46053 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46056 \begin_layout Standard
46057 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46058 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46060 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46061 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46063 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46068 \begin_layout Standard
46069 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46072 \begin_layout Standard
46073 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46075 The syntax of the entries is:
46078 \begin_layout Standard
46084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46103 \begin_layout Standard
46104 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
46105 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
46106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46133 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
46134 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
46135 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
46136 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
46138 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
46142 , you needed to specify it as
46147 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
46150 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
46153 \begin_layout Subsection
46155 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46157 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46162 \begin_inset Index idx
46165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46172 \begin_inset Index idx
46175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46176 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46184 \begin_layout Standard
46185 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46186 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46187 provides keyboard maps.
46188 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46189 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46192 \begin_inset space ~
46196 \begin_inset space ~
46201 and select the keyboard map file named
46208 \begin_layout Standard
46217 keyboard map and, if you use the
46221 bindings, you can select the first and second with
46224 arg "keymap-primary"
46230 arg "keymap-secondary"
46233 respectively or toggle between them with
46236 arg "keymap-toggle"
46242 \begin_layout Standard
46243 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46251 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
46260 \begin_layout Standard
46261 You can also specify the mouse
46263 Wheel scrolling speed
46266 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
46270 Middle mouse button pasting
46272 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
46273 inserts the content of the clipboard.
46276 \begin_layout Standard
46284 \begin_inset space ~
46288 \begin_inset space ~
46293 you can select a key for zooming.
46294 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
46297 \begin_layout Subsection
46301 \begin_layout Standard
46302 Input completion is described in section
46303 \begin_inset space ~
46307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46309 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
46316 \begin_layout Section
46318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46325 \begin_inset Index idx
46328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46335 \begin_inset Index idx
46338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46347 \begin_layout Standard
46348 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
46349 are normally determined during
46351 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
46354 \begin_layout Description
46356 \begin_inset space ~
46359 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
46360 's working directory.
46361 It is the default when you
46372 \begin_inset space ~
46380 \begin_layout Description
46382 \begin_inset space ~
46385 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
46387 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46389 \begin_inset space ~
46393 \begin_inset space ~
46401 \begin_layout Description
46403 \begin_inset space ~
46406 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
46412 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46416 \begin_inset Newline newline
46420 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46432 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
46433 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
46441 \begin_layout Description
46443 \begin_inset space ~
46447 \begin_inset Index idx
46450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46456 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
46457 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
46458 \begin_inset space ~
46462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46464 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
46472 will be used to save the backups.
46473 \begin_inset Newline newline
46476 Backup files have the ending
46477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46487 \begin_layout Description
46489 \begin_inset space ~
46492 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
46493 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
46495 \begin_inset Newline newline
46502 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46508 You can edit this file with the program
46517 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
46518 in its preferences under
46521 \begin_inset space ~
46527 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
46532 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
46534 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
46535 in your \SpecialChar LyX
46541 and \SpecialChar LyX
46542 need to be running the same time.
46543 \begin_inset Newline newline
46546 The pipe is also used for the
46550 feature, see section
46551 \begin_inset space ~
46555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46557 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
46562 \begin_inset Newline newline
46565 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
46566 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
46567 \begin_inset Newline newline
46583 \begin_layout Description
46585 \begin_inset space ~
46588 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
46591 \begin_layout Description
46593 \begin_inset space ~
46596 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
46597 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
46598 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
46601 \begin_layout Description
46603 \begin_inset space ~
46606 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
46612 You only need to specify it if you are using
46616 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
46618 For \SpecialChar LyX
46623 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
46627 \begin_layout Description
46629 \begin_inset space ~
46632 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
46633 When \SpecialChar LyX
46634 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
46635 to find it on the system.
46636 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
46638 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
46640 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46644 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46647 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
46648 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
46651 \begin_layout Description
46653 \begin_inset space ~
46656 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
46657 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
46658 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
46659 code or in the document
46661 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
46663 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
46664 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
46665 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
46666 scanned for the input files.
46667 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
46668 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
46670 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
46671 compilation may fail for some documents.
46674 \begin_layout Section
46678 \begin_layout Standard
46679 Here you can insert your
46688 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
46690 \begin_inset space ~
46694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46696 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
46700 , to mark changes you make as yours.
46703 \begin_layout Section
46705 \begin_inset Index idx
46708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46709 Language ! Settings
46715 \begin_inset Index idx
46718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46719 Settings ! Language
46727 \begin_layout Subsection
46729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46731 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
46738 \begin_layout Description
46740 \begin_inset space ~
46744 \begin_inset space ~
46747 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
46749 You can find its actual translation status here:
46750 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46752 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
46760 \begin_layout Description
46762 \begin_inset space ~
46765 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
46766 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
46767 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
46768 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
46769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46785 The most widespread language package is
46790 \begin_inset Index idx
46793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46800 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
46802 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46803 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46804 come with the alternative
46810 \begin_inset Index idx
46813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46815 packages ! polyglossia
46820 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
46821 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
46827 The available selections are described in section
46828 \begin_inset space ~
46832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46834 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
46841 \begin_layout Description
46843 \begin_inset space ~
46846 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
46847 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
46848 you can here specify the command to start the package.
46849 An example is the start command
46855 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
46857 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
46861 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46877 selectlanguage{$$lang}
46882 \begin_layout Description
46884 \begin_inset space ~
46892 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
46893 command toggles the package on and off.
46896 \begin_layout Description
46898 \begin_inset space ~
46902 \begin_inset space ~
46905 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
46909 \begin_layout Description
46911 \begin_inset space ~
46915 \begin_inset space ~
46918 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
46922 \begin_layout Description
46924 \begin_inset space ~
46928 \begin_inset space ~
46931 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
46932 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
46933 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
46935 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
46942 \begin_layout Description
46944 \begin_inset space ~
46947 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
46949 When this option is not set, the
46952 \begin_inset space ~
46957 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46959 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
46962 \begin_inset space ~
46970 \begin_layout Description
46972 \begin_inset space ~
46978 \begin_inset space ~
46984 When it is not set, the
46987 \begin_inset space ~
46992 is set to the end of the document.
46995 \begin_layout Description
46997 \begin_inset space ~
47001 \begin_inset space ~
47004 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47005 language will be underlined in blue.
47008 \begin_layout Description
47010 \begin_inset space ~
47014 \begin_inset space ~
47017 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47018 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47021 \begin_layout Description
47023 \begin_inset space ~
47026 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47027 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47028 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47029 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47032 \begin_layout Subsection
47036 \begin_layout Standard
47037 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47038 \begin_inset space ~
47042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47044 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47051 \begin_layout Section
47055 \begin_layout Subsection
47057 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47059 name "subsec:General-output"
47066 \begin_layout Description
47068 \begin_inset space ~
47071 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47073 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47075 \begin_inset space ~
47081 For a detailed description see section
47083 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47088 \begin_inset space ~
47096 \begin_layout Description
47098 \begin_inset space ~
47101 Options Options for the program
47105 that is used for the export format
47110 \begin_inset space ~
47114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47116 reference "subsec:Export"
47121 Possible options are listed in the
47126 \begin_inset Newline newline
47130 \begin_inset Flex URL
47133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47135 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47145 \begin_layout Description
47147 \begin_inset space ~
47151 \begin_inset space ~
47154 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47157 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47158 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47160 \begin_inset space ~
47166 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47169 \begin_layout Description
47171 \begin_inset space ~
47175 \begin_inset Index idx
47178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47185 \begin_inset Index idx
47188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47189 Settings ! Date format
47194 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47195 \begin_inset Newline newline
47199 \begin_inset Flex URL
47202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47204 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47210 \begin_inset Newline newline
47213 For example the format
47214 \begin_inset Newline newline
47218 \begin_inset Newline newline
47221 prints the date as day/month/year.
47224 \begin_layout Description
47226 \begin_inset space ~
47230 \begin_inset space ~
47233 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
47234 is allowed to overwrite on export.
47237 \begin_layout Subsection
47243 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47245 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
47250 \begin_inset Index idx
47253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47254 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
47263 \begin_layout Description
47265 \begin_inset space ~
47273 \begin_inset space ~
47277 \begin_inset space ~
47280 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
47285 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
47306 are used for Cyrillic.
47307 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
47308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47320 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
47322 sets up in the background.
47323 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
47326 \begin_layout Description
47328 \begin_inset space ~
47332 \begin_inset space ~
47336 \begin_inset space ~
47340 \begin_inset space ~
47343 options They only have an effect when the program
47347 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
47350 \begin_layout Standard
47351 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
47352 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
47353 manuals of the applications.
47356 \begin_layout Description
47358 \begin_inset space ~
47361 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
47362 \begin_inset space ~
47366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47368 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
47375 \begin_layout Description
47377 \begin_inset space ~
47380 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
47381 \begin_inset space ~
47385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47387 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
47394 \begin_layout Description
47396 \begin_inset space ~
47399 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
47400 \begin_inset space ~
47404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47406 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
47413 \begin_layout Description
47419 \begin_inset space ~
47422 command Command for the program
47424 Check\SpecialChar TeX
47427 that is described in the section
47429 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
47434 Additional Features
47439 \begin_layout Standard
47440 There are additionally the following options:
47443 \begin_layout Description
47445 \begin_inset space ~
47449 \begin_inset space ~
47453 \begin_inset space ~
47457 \begin_inset space ~
47462 \begin_inset space ~
47465 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
47466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47483 to separate folders.
47484 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
47486 \begin_inset Index idx
47489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47496 \begin_inset Index idx
47499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47508 \begin_layout Description
47510 \begin_inset space ~
47514 \begin_inset space ~
47518 \begin_inset space ~
47522 \begin_inset space ~
47526 \begin_inset space ~
47530 \begin_inset space ~
47533 changes Removes all manually set
47539 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47540 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47542 \begin_inset space ~
47547 dialog when changing the document class.
47550 \begin_layout Section
47552 \begin_inset space ~
47556 \begin_inset Index idx
47559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47568 \begin_layout Subsection
47570 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47572 name "subsec:Converters"
47577 \begin_inset Index idx
47580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47589 \begin_layout Standard
47590 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
47591 from one format to another.
47592 You can modify converters or create new ones.
47593 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
47600 \begin_inset space ~
47605 field and press the
47610 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
47614 \begin_inset space ~
47619 drop-down list, modify the
47623 field and press the
47630 \begin_layout Standard
47633 Converter File Cache
47639 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
47641 Maximum Age (in days
47644 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
47645 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
47648 \begin_layout Standard
47649 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
47650 definition, is described in the section
47661 \begin_layout Subsection
47663 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47665 name "sec:File-Formats"
47670 \begin_inset Index idx
47673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47680 \begin_inset Index idx
47683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47692 \begin_layout Standard
47693 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
47703 programs that should be used for certain formats.
47706 \begin_layout Standard
47707 You can also define the
47709 Default output format
47711 that is used when you use
47713 View, Update, View Master Document
47717 Update Master Document
47723 menu or the toolbar.
47726 \begin_layout Standard
47727 More about formats and their options is described in the section
47738 \begin_layout Standard
47739 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
47741 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
47742 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
47743 This is done by specifying a
47748 More about this is described in the section
47759 \begin_layout Chapter
47760 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
47762 \begin_inset Index idx
47765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47772 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47774 name "chap:Units-available-in"
47781 \begin_layout Standard
47783 \begin_inset space ~
47787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47789 reference "tab:Units"
47793 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
47794 and used in this documentation.
47797 \begin_layout Standard
47798 \begin_inset Float table
47804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47805 \begin_inset Caption Standard
47807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47808 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47823 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
47829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47831 \begin_inset Tabular
47832 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
47833 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
47834 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
47835 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
47836 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
47838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48006 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48010 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48042 scaled point (65536
48043 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48047 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48080 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48084 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48117 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48121 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48125 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48162 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48194 % of original image width
48199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48476 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48480 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48510 \begin_layout Chapter
48512 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48514 name "chap:Credits"
48521 \begin_layout Standard
48522 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
48523 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
48526 \begin_layout Itemize
48529 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
48532 \begin_layout Itemize
48538 \begin_layout Itemize
48544 \begin_layout Itemize
48550 \begin_layout Itemize
48556 \begin_layout Itemize
48562 \begin_layout Itemize
48568 \begin_layout Itemize
48574 \begin_layout Itemize
48577 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
48580 \begin_layout Itemize
48586 \begin_layout Itemize
48592 \begin_layout Itemize
48598 \begin_layout Itemize
48604 \begin_layout Itemize
48610 \begin_layout Itemize
48616 \begin_layout Itemize
48622 \begin_layout Itemize
48628 \begin_layout Itemize
48629 The \SpecialChar LyX
48631 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
48641 \begin_layout Standard
48642 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
48645 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
48652 \begin_layout Bibliography
48653 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48654 LatexCommand bibitem
48661 The \SpecialChar LyX
48663 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48666 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
48672 \begin_inset Newline newline
48676 \begin_inset Flex URL
48679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48681 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
48689 \begin_layout Bibliography
48690 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48691 LatexCommand bibitem
48692 key "latexcompanion"
48697 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
48699 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
48700 Companion Second Edition.
48703 Addison-Wesley, 2004
48706 \begin_layout Bibliography
48707 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48708 LatexCommand bibitem
48714 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
48717 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
48721 Addison-Wesley, 2003
48724 \begin_layout Bibliography
48725 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48726 LatexCommand bibitem
48735 : A Document Preparation System.
48738 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
48741 \begin_layout Bibliography
48742 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48743 LatexCommand bibitem
48753 The \SpecialChar TeX
48757 Addison-Wesley, 1984
48760 \begin_layout Bibliography
48761 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48762 LatexCommand bibitem
48768 The \SpecialChar TeX
48770 \begin_inset Newline newline
48774 \begin_inset Flex URL
48777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48779 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
48787 \begin_layout Bibliography
48788 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48789 LatexCommand bibitem
48795 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
48797 \begin_inset Newline newline
48801 \begin_inset Flex URL
48804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48806 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
48814 \begin_layout Bibliography
48815 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48816 LatexCommand bibitem
48823 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48825 name "Documentation"
48826 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
48833 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48837 \begin_inset Newline newline
48841 \begin_inset Flex URL
48844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48846 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
48854 \begin_layout Bibliography
48855 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48856 LatexCommand bibitem
48863 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48865 name "Documentation"
48866 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
48871 how to use the program
48873 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48877 \begin_inset Newline newline
48881 \begin_inset Flex URL
48884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48886 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
48894 \begin_layout Bibliography
48895 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48896 LatexCommand bibitem
48903 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48905 name "Documentation"
48906 target "http://www.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
48911 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48917 \begin_inset Index idx
48920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48922 packages ! biblatex
48928 \begin_inset Newline newline
48932 \begin_inset Flex URL
48935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48937 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
48945 \begin_layout Bibliography
48946 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48947 LatexCommand bibitem
48954 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48956 name "Documentation"
48957 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
48962 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48968 \begin_inset Index idx
48971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48979 \begin_inset Newline newline
48983 \begin_inset Flex URL
48986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48988 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
48996 \begin_layout Bibliography
48997 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48998 LatexCommand bibitem
49005 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49007 name "Documentation"
49008 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49018 \begin_inset Newline newline
49022 \begin_inset Flex URL
49025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49027 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49035 \begin_layout Bibliography
49036 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49037 LatexCommand bibitem
49038 key "makeindex-man"
49044 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49047 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49057 \begin_inset Newline newline
49061 \begin_inset Flex URL
49064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49066 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49074 \begin_layout Bibliography
49075 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49076 LatexCommand bibitem
49083 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49085 name "Documentation"
49086 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49096 \begin_inset Newline newline
49100 \begin_inset Flex URL
49103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49105 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49113 \begin_layout Bibliography
49114 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49115 LatexCommand bibitem
49122 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49124 name "Documentation"
49125 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49130 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49132 \begin_inset Newline newline
49136 \begin_inset Flex URL
49139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49141 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49149 \begin_layout Bibliography
49150 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49151 LatexCommand bibitem
49158 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49160 name "Documentation"
49161 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49166 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49172 \begin_inset Index idx
49175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49183 \begin_inset Newline newline
49187 \begin_inset Flex URL
49190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49192 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49200 \begin_layout Bibliography
49201 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49202 LatexCommand bibitem
49209 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49211 name "Documentation"
49212 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49217 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49223 \begin_inset Index idx
49226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49228 packages ! enumitem
49234 \begin_inset Newline newline
49238 \begin_inset Flex URL
49241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49243 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49251 \begin_layout Bibliography
49252 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49253 LatexCommand bibitem
49260 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49262 name "Documentation"
49263 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49268 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49274 \begin_inset Index idx
49277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49279 packages ! fancyhdr
49285 \begin_inset Newline newline
49289 \begin_inset Flex URL
49292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49294 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49302 \begin_layout Bibliography
49303 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49304 LatexCommand bibitem
49311 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49313 name "Documentation"
49314 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
49319 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49325 \begin_inset Index idx
49328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49330 packages ! hyperref
49336 \begin_inset Newline newline
49340 \begin_inset Flex URL
49343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49345 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
49353 \begin_layout Bibliography
49354 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49355 LatexCommand bibitem
49362 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49364 name "Documentation"
49365 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
49370 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49376 \begin_inset Index idx
49379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49387 \begin_inset Newline newline
49391 \begin_inset Flex URL
49394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49396 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
49404 \begin_layout Bibliography
49405 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49406 LatexCommand bibitem
49413 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49415 name "Documentation"
49416 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
49421 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49427 \begin_inset Index idx
49430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49432 packages ! prettyref
49438 \begin_inset Newline newline
49442 \begin_inset Flex URL
49445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49447 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
49455 \begin_layout Bibliography
49456 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49457 LatexCommand bibitem
49464 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49466 name "Documentation"
49467 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
49472 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49478 \begin_inset Index idx
49481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49483 packages ! refstyle
49489 \begin_inset Newline newline
49493 \begin_inset Flex URL
49496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49498 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
49506 \begin_layout Bibliography
49507 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49508 LatexCommand bibitem
49515 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49518 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
49523 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49525 \begin_inset Newline newline
49529 \begin_inset Flex URL
49532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49534 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
49542 \begin_layout Bibliography
49543 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49544 LatexCommand bibitem
49551 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49554 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
49559 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49561 \begin_inset Newline newline
49565 \begin_inset Flex URL
49568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49570 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
49578 \begin_layout Bibliography
49579 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49580 LatexCommand bibitem
49587 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49590 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
49595 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49596 for Cyrillic languages:
49597 \begin_inset Newline newline
49601 \begin_inset Flex URL
49604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49606 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
49614 \begin_layout Bibliography
49615 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49616 LatexCommand bibitem
49623 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49626 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
49631 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49633 \begin_inset Newline newline
49637 \begin_inset Flex URL
49640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49642 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
49650 \begin_layout Bibliography
49651 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49652 LatexCommand bibitem
49659 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49662 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
49667 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49669 \begin_inset Newline newline
49673 \begin_inset Flex URL
49676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49678 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
49686 \begin_layout Bibliography
49687 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49688 LatexCommand bibitem
49695 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49698 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
49703 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49705 \begin_inset Newline newline
49709 \begin_inset Flex URL
49712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49714 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
49722 \begin_layout Bibliography
49723 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49724 LatexCommand bibitem
49731 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49734 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
49739 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49741 \begin_inset Newline newline
49745 \begin_inset Flex URL
49748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49750 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
49758 \begin_layout Bibliography
49759 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49760 LatexCommand bibitem
49767 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49770 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
49775 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49777 \begin_inset Newline newline
49781 \begin_inset Flex URL
49784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49786 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
49794 \begin_layout Bibliography
49795 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49796 LatexCommand bibitem
49803 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49806 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
49811 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49813 \begin_inset Newline newline
49817 \begin_inset Flex URL
49820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49822 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
49830 \begin_layout Bibliography
49831 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49832 LatexCommand bibitem
49839 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49842 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
49847 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49849 \begin_inset Newline newline
49853 \begin_inset Flex URL
49856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49858 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
49866 \begin_layout Bibliography
49867 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49868 LatexCommand bibitem
49875 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49878 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
49883 about new features in
49889 \begin_inset Newline newline
49893 \begin_inset Flex URL
49896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49898 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
49906 \begin_layout Standard
49907 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49941 \begin_inset Note Note
49944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49951 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
49952 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
49953 bibliography is the second one:
49961 \begin_layout Standard
49962 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
49963 LatexCommand bibtex
49964 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
49965 options "biblio/alphadin"
49972 \begin_layout Standard
49973 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49977 \begin_layout Standard
49978 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
49979 LatexCommand printnomenclature
49985 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
49986 LatexCommand printindex